JP6205542B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as can be seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when winning is won.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning game ball at the starting port. Then, when a game ball is won at the start opening, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is made. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display manner indicating that the winning combination is won, and the opening / closing member of the big prize opening is operated, so that it is more for the player. A special game that can be awarded a prize is offered.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a determination process for winning is performed, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Next, there is an effect as to whether or not the plurality of symbols variably displayed in this way are stopped and displayed in a special symbol combination that suggests that the symbol has been won. As a result, the player can enjoy the above-mentioned presentation about whether or not to stop display with a special symbol combination, and can recognize the result of the determination process from the symbol combination finally stopped and displayed. And will be able to play.

JP 2010-187791 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine , there is a concern that the gaming interest will decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: Operation means operable by the player;
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of the start condition;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on a result of determination by the determination means;
Advantageous game control means for performing advantageous control for the player when a special symbol aspect appears due to the symbol variation by the symbol variation means,
A holding means capable of holding the determination by the determining means up to a predetermined upper limit number of holds;
In predetermined effect condition, among the operation acceptance for even before Symbol operating means are acceptable in any of them symbol variation when multiple symbol variation being the state of the pending is sequentially digested, the operation If reception is made, it can generate a specific operation Starring unloading suggests expectation that the special symbol aspects appear in symbol variation in symbol variation or execution state is in a state of hold when the manipulation reception is made specific Operation effect control means,
The specific operation effect control means includes
Even in the case where the number of symbol variations exceeding the predetermined upper limit of the number of reservations is sequentially digested, any of these symbol variations can allow operation reception to the operation means with respect to the specific operation effect,
When the number of symbol variations exceeding the predetermined number of reserved upper limits is sequentially digested, an effect mode according to a result determined when the symbol variation is newly digested is an operation on the operation means for each symbol variation. It can be displayed during the period when reception is allowed,
The specific operation while appearing different second representation embodiment the first said and if the operation acceptance has been made about the specific operation effect in a state in which the representation embodiment has appeared first representation embodiment as the representation embodiment in the case where the operation reception related effect is made, the game, wherein a percentage of the expected degree of the special symbol aspect appears appears as suggesting high expectations representation embodiment said specific operation directing and go relatively high are different Machine.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, abbreviate | omitting the left frame member, (b) is an exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right production | presentation unit of FIG.42 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery device. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. FIG. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the back in FIG. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 85 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front structural member of embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 88 from back. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in the attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which cut and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center actor from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center actor from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center actor from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right middle production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right middle production | presentation unit and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled 2nd embodiment of the fixed decoration body in a front right middle production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed decoration body of FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decoration body of FIG. 123 from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the position slightly left with respect to the front, (C) is the perspective view seen from the position further left than (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the production | presentation sheet in the fixed decoration body of FIG. 123, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light extinction, (c) shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of blue lighting. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side direction production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side direction production unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side direction production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit of the back side direction production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side direction production unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle production unit of the center role in the front unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle production unit in the normal position, and (b) is a front view with the front right movable decorative body in the appearance position. It is the perspective view seen from the slightly upper direction. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side effect unit in the back unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back top production unit and the back bottom production unit in the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) A jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot, (B) a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot on the first special symbol side, and (C) a second special symbol side It is a symbol determination table used for the lottery process about the big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the example about the content concerning the game and effect progress when the big hit game according to the big hit is performed when the big hit of a specific type is obtained. It is a figure explaining the flow of the production | presentation progress as a concept about the above-mentioned round roll-up production performed based on the big hit of a specific kind being obtained. When the same game control as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (c) appears, when realizing the round roll-up effect, one game block and one block interval period or one time-short state (predetermined number) It is a figure which shows the example which makes one block effect appear over the period until a design fluctuation | variation of (1) is digested. Depending on the number of changes in the special symbol (from 1 to 30 revolutions) after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second starting port 2102 side (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit) is terminated. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table referred in the 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The main control MPU 4100a advances the game based on the control mode shown in FIG. 164 while maintaining the value of the second special reserved number counter at “1” or more, and as a result, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is specified x times. It is a figure which shows time (y second) required after the big hit game state is complete | finished until the variation time of the symbol according to this big hit is complete | finished when it is assumed that the big hit of a kind is obtained. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect using the operation effect reception period in the period when the special control by main control MPU4100a is performed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 as viewed from the front, and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a gaming window 111 having a rectangular external shape in front view and penetrating front and rear, and a front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 Handle device 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear lower part of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached and missed in the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the tray unit 200, and a game ball of the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 is launched. A ball feeding unit 540 for feeding to the apparatus 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the gaming window 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear portion of the glass unit 560 are provided. .

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A prize ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the prize ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding in the leftward direction, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear upper surface of the payout unit base 801 and that guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; The ball guide unit 820 is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820 and guided by the ball guide unit 820. Based on an instruction from a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 143) housed in the payout control board box 960, the payout device 830 pays out game balls one by one, and the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801. The upper full sphere that guides the game sphere paid out by the player and releases the game sphere from either the normal discharge port or the full discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. The game ball attached to the lower end of the path unit 850 and the payout unit base 801 and released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The full tank which guides the game ball released from the normal guideway and the full tank outlet to the front and guides it from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a conduit, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is accommodated, and the payout control board 4110 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the dispensing of the game ball is accommodated. A payout control board box 960; That.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1110 having an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112 guided to the front, a flat game panel 1150 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1150 A box-shaped board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 4100 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1160 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. The main control board box 1170 and a plurality of winnings that can be received in the game area 5a attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1150 and can be received. (The not shown) table unit having a includes a, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 in the upper of the substrate holder 1160, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a that extends in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size through which only one game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 vertically. And a discharge hole 74. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. In the horizontal portion 71, the discharge hole 74 is in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the protruding portions 32 and 42. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 is fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface in the left-right direction of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 16 and 17 show a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. FIG. The description will be given with reference. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock body 63 are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front protrusion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66 a only contacts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a risk of being sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle device 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the gaming window 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, etc., has a plate-like door frame base 110 having a gaming window 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a vertically long rectangle. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle device 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the front lower right corner, and a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A glass unit for removably attaching the glass unit 560, which is rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the rear side of the door frame base 110. And Tsu DOO mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the game window 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the game window 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the handle device 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle main body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle device 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 and a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 143) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A stop button that can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 143) that is attached in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit main body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and having the front side opened. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and the box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid 551 (see FIG. 143) for releasing game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a ball entry. A switching mechanism that switches the game ball that has entered from the mouth 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the game window 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the touch unit disassembled, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 39 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the lower right door production unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the lower right door production unit, and FIG. 43 (a) shows the lower right door production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from back. FIG. 44 is a DD cross-sectional view of the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 49A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit with the door lower right rotating body facing forward, and FIG. 49B is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing rear.

  FIG. 50 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50 (b) is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 53 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board 4010 (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to be transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is open on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving part 230c is formed in the shape of a pyramid cylinder so that it may narrow as it goes below (refer FIG. 41). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, and an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from above. A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is difficult to break, a capacitive sensor sheet 246 provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. I have.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled, and the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the rendering operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends leftward and rightward, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle device 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower side of the plate body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

[3-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle device 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, Detection sensor 278, and a door bottom right base decorated substrate 280 door bottom right relay board 281 that relays the connection between the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 and the peripheral control board 4010 and later, and.

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 278 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 49B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[3-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 50B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower tray 202 do not fall downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projections 322a are released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220 near the right end in front view and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 is detected by a ball lending switch when a ball lending button 332 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and is detected by a ball lending switch. A number of game balls can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remainder detected by the return switch is subtracted and inserted. The remaining cash and prepaid card will be returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 and the like, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

[3-1l. Characteristic effects of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41, because the post-upper decoration board 235 for emitting and decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. 54A is a perspective view of the door frame foul cover unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 55A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the front side of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 that is open on the front side. A flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and passes through the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiving port 528 that opens toward the rear on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 in the front view and communicates with the full guide path 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4; It has.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 that are opened forward in the lower right corner when viewed from the front are released. And a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a plate-shaped movable piece 534 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 has a certain amount in the storage passage 533 when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game ball, The rotation is detected by a full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the through ball passage 526, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 79). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway door member 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing section 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact section 537, the guide path door member 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame exploded for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 as viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. And the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and the bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. And a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602 and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front. And.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is attached to the rear end to be rotatable. The rear extension part 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to a position slightly lower on the left side of the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge main body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates the lower hinge second main body 643 and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 up and down, and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 is passed through. A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for axial support, and a door frame extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of 3. .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main body side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. FIG. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the game ball driving strength changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle device 500 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with the strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the guide rails (the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112) of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112). From the lower foul cover unit 520 to the foul ball receiving port 530, passes through the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape protruding forward from the lower part of the unit base 701 from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. 61 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from behind. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled as the main structure. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 67 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 67 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 70A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of a payout blade in the payout device.

  FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 74 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 75A is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 75B is a perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 78 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the prize ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the prize ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 960. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. A normal guiding path 861 for guiding the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged in the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends passing through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear race 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member rear 826 that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively. The ball breakage detection sensor 827 is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height from the introduction portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821 The detection portion 821e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821d to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a height center along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822d to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c coincide with each other in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the movable piece member front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f in front of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 825 are movable. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the single member 826 is detected by one single ball break detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece 825 Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball break detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a can be changed depending on the weight of the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826 by its own weight and the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passage 822c and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c are provided with an introduction portion 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude to the inside. As the game ball flows in the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. It has a box shape with the front side open, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are paid. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout vanes 839 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, the payout device 830 can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 contacts the outer periphery of the front blades 839b and 839c. Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d, from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface bent in a square shape of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843c A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 71) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60B). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 381e and 832e by the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b is It is located directly under the ball outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, full tank guide path 862, and lower ball extraction guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 80).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and released downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. When the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and is fully filled. It is discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full-ball path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guiding it from the front end to the full tank reception port 530 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends from the base portion 863a obliquely to the upper left side in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the through ball path 526, the full tank reception port 530, and the door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is provided. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 78). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation is performed. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 78B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. A through ball passage 526 and a full tank reception port 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has a larger number of game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e The payout of game balls to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and cannot be supplied to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 is provided. Game balls are stored in the storage passage 533. And when the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 by storing the game ball in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 relative to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. In such a state, the number can be filled in the storage passage 533 on the upstream side, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage path 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to store more game balls than conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, in a gaming state where a lot of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are released by the payout of the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is housed, and a payout control board that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and that houses a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls. A box 960.

  The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 960.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 84A is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state where it is attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 84B is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 82 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is a game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 85 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 85 and the like, as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is a game board as seen from the rear of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 5 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 5a into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular. A member 1110, a plate-like gaming panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that controls the content of a game that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 5a and that is controlled by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. A function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. The game board 5 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. 81 to 87 and will be described in detail later. It is further provided (see FIGS. 92 to 98, etc.).

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a basic structure formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 accommodated in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 5 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 5 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 5 of the present example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the main body frame 4 and has an inner shape that penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. Thus, the outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1111 inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the upper left side when viewed from the front. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is arranged at the lowermost end of the game area 5a at the boundary of the outer opening 111 and is pivotally supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed to the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In the front component member 1110, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is an extension of the launch rail 684 in the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. It is located on the line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 684, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 684 of the ball launcher 680 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The game area 5a can be entered by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the ball launcher 680, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 5a comes into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 5a attempts to return to between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102 or a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201 or the like of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 5a. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 5. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 cannot enter the game area 5a beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolls downward in the opposite direction, and falls in a foul space formed between the upper end of the launch rail 684 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Thus, it is received in the foul ball receiving port 530 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 located at the lower part of the foul space, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 in the plate unit 200.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove that extends from the front end to a predetermined amount. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece of the security cover 580 in the door frame 3 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 5a. I can't do it.

  Moreover, when the front structural member 1110 of this example is in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the post-crime protrusion pieces of the security cover 580 in the door frame 3 are inserted into the rail security grooves. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 5a). Also, the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove and the post-crime protruding piece can prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire entering from between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 from reaching the game area 5a. It can be done.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. By positioning the positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 4, the left end in front view of the game board 5 inserted into the main body frame 4 is The movement in the front-rear direction can be restricted. In addition, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 4, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By engaging with the engaging portion 608, the right end of the game board 5 inserted into the main body frame 4 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 rotates the game board lock member 616 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 4 in the clockwise direction when the game board 5 is inserted into the main body frame 4. When moved, a fixed piece of the game board lock member 616 is inserted, and the game board lock member 616 restricts the lower end of the game board 5 from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with a similar ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 5 can be connected to the opening of the main body frame 4. In the inserted state, the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 5 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 5.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail crime prevention groove along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 5 will be described. The gaming panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 83). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 5 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 5a whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the gaming area 5a on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 5a. When assembled in the gaming board 5, the gaming panel 1150 is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 5a in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 5.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 5 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 4. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear surface, and a fixing portion. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 5 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 5 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 84A, the game state that changes depending on the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol indicator 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as the first special symbol indicator 1185 is disposed diagonally to the right of the first special symbol indicator 1185 and is connected to the second starting port 2102. A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball as a second special symbol, and up and down on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 A second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the reception of game balls to the second start port 2102, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the direction.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a reserved number related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by a game ball that is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, low probability non-short state, short time state, high probability non-short state, high probability short time state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed. ing.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. More specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holds is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the fluctuation pattern, and the first special LED is displayed depending on the emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The player can recognize the lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color and the lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time similarly to the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a 4-round display lamp 1190a and a 16-round display lamp 1190b made of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 84A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 111 of the door frame 3 with the game board 5 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 143). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 5, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 5, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 5 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 5 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above and has a plate-like shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 5a, the outer periphery of which is partitioned by the front component member 1110, from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 5a, such as a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, the details of which will be described later. Thus, the attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 97 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the attachment boss of the front component member 1110 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in the form of a predetermined depression on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 137, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227 It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By fixing and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 It can be securely installed and installed in the opening of the main body frame 4 of the (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 85, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within that range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 86) that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and that opens at the lower end side downward. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is a positioning protrusion 607 provided on the main body frame 4 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 5 is inserted and held in the main body frame 4. When the out ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607, the relative movement of the game board 5 in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 4 is restricted. ing.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state of holding the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 5a on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 5a is visible to the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. The gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 88 and 90 have the outer shape of the panel board 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 85 to 87, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the game board 5 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet. It is formed in a straight line inclined so that the distance to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of this example can secure a wider game area 5a than the above-described front component member 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 5a. It can be done.

  In the example of FIGS. 88 and 89, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 82 and FIG. A gaming panel 1150 made of a single plate as shown in 83 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 91 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 90, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 4. A metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 3 and a metal reinforcing unit 151 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 3.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 4 is formed of an extrusion mold made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 5 are combined. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 4. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 4 is increased so that the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 151 of the door frame 3 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 111 in the door frame 3 using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 of the reinforcement unit 151, the strength of the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcement sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 3 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 on the shaft support side. When an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed on the inner side of the front end of the security side plate 950 are provided. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcement unit 151 in the door frame 3 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 3 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the pivotal U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 4. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 4, the closed door frame 3 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 3 against the door 4.

  Further, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 4 and the reinforcing unit 151 formed of metal in the door frame 3 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 5, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 5a on the front surface of the game board 5 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 90, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91, a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present example includes units of a winning ball base 790, a tank rail 803, and a payout device 830 in the main body frame 4 that houses the game board 5. Since the base, the lower full ball path unit 860, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side or the side of the game board 5 accommodated in the main body frame 4. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 4 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 4. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 5 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device and to increase the deterrent against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side or side surface of the game board 5 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 4 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 5 is attached to or detached from the board 4, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, they are placed outside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 96 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG.

  The game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when a player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game region 5a to be driven in, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 5a that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 5a. A plate-like game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 96 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and defining a rear end of the game area 5a.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

  The game board 5 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a rear side of the back unit 3000 from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the board.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 of the present example includes an attacker unit 2100 arranged to extend in the lower part in the game area 5a from right above the out port 1151 to the right in front view, and a pachinko machine on the right front surface of the attacker unit 2100. A function display unit 1180 that is attached to a position that can be visually recognized from the gaming window 111 of the door frame 3 to the player side when attached to the player frame 1, and an inner periphery of the gaming area 5 a on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A front side unit 2200 arranged along the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010, a back side effect unit 3100 arranged over the upper side and both left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, a back side effect unit 3300 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, And a lower back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 5, a peripheral control board that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 143) having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 for accommodating an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

  In the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a is divided into right and left by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1150. Between the inner periphery of the region 5a (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A), the width is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the game region 5a Between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A), the game ball 1150 is a wide area in which the game ball can be sufficiently distributed. A plurality of obstruction nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface.

  In the game board 5 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined level or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the right outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The guide ball member 2142 flows down and is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 to be discharged downward from directly above the gate portion 2105, so that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability. Yes. In other words, the game ball can easily enter the gate portion 2105 by performing a so-called right hit.

  Although details will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIG. 112, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126 in a short time state, the normal lottery result is obtained in a very short time. Since the lottery is executed, if the normal lottery result is “winning”, the movable piece 2106 moves backward to allow the game ball to be received at the second start port 2102, and to the gate unit 2105. The game ball that has entered enters the second start port 2102 as it is. When the normal lottery is “losing”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the big winning opening 2103. Therefore, a game that directly targets the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 can be performed by making a right strike.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called left-handed), the game ball is guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 or the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of planted obstacle nails, A game ball can be awarded to the general winning port 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning port 2104, and the like. Further, when a game ball enters the warp inlet 2504 that is guided to the warp inlet 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, and the stage The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement caused by the obstacle nail. When released, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be awarded with a high probability.

  As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the right and left sides of the center accessory 2500 can be played with different impressions, and it is difficult to get bored by providing various games. Can be done.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 is arranged so as to extend from right above the out port 1151 to the right side at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the attacker unit 2100. Function display unit 1180 attached to the front right end surface in front view, a front side unit 2200 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc along the inner periphery of the game area 5a, and a substantially central portion of the game area 5a And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is arranged on the right side of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

  The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, pays out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting game balls and receives a first special opening lot 2101 and a second to draw a predetermined special lottery result upon acceptance. A start opening 2102, a game ball can be received according to the result of the special lottery, and a large winning opening 2103 for receiving a game ball by receiving the game ball, and a predetermined number of game balls by receiving the game ball are received. A general payout opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate unit 2105 from which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn in response to the passage of the game ball are provided.

  The first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 in this example are always capable of receiving game balls. Further, the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings that can be changed between a state where a game ball can be received and a state where the game ball cannot be received. The second starting port 2102 can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2105, and the big winning port 2103 is the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102. It is possible to accept according to a special lottery result that is drawn in response to the acceptance of game balls.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged on the axis line (directly above the out port 1151) passing through the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, the second start port 2102 is provided with a first passage 2122a (guide route) through which the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2106. In the 2nd unit 2120 comprised as one unit (prize ball apparatus), it arrange | positions so that it may become a front view lower right side rather than the 1st starting port 2101. FIG. Further, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged below the second starting port 2102 and on the right side in front of the first starting port 2101 so that the left end is substantially directly below the second starting port 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first start opening 2101. Further, the gate portion 2105 is disposed right above the second starting port 2102 on the upper right side in front view from the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, includes three general winning holes 2201 arranged on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100 and an upper left side of the general winning hole 2201 in front of the game. There is provided a shelf 2202 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a to the right.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 includes a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, a peripheral wall portion 2503 that prevents a game ball flowing down in the game area 5a from entering the frame, A warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position on the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that has been released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction. And a stage 2510 that is later discharged into the game area 5a and refluxed.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball recirculated and released from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510 into the game area 5a has a high probability. The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 can be received.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear after being broken down as the main member. Further, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front after disassembling the second unit, and FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear after exploded. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 112 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit cut away.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 5 in the table unit 2000 of the present example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150 and then placed on the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2101 that is arranged immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1150 and is capable of receiving game balls at all times, and a position slightly on the right side and slightly below the first start port 2101 A second start port 2102 (see FIG. 112) disposed at the top, a big winning port 2103 disposed below the second start port 2102 and on the right side of the first start port 2101 as viewed from the front, and a first start port 2101 And a general winning port 2104 disposed slightly above the first starting port 2101.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 includes a gate unit 2105 for drawing a normal lottery result in response to the passing of a game ball. The gate portion 2105 is arranged on the right side and slightly above the general winning opening 2104 and slightly above the second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 112).

  As shown in the figure, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. In addition, the second start port 2102 (see FIG. 112) is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is a plate that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the opened opening. A movable piece 2106 is provided. The second start port 2102 is configured such that when the movable piece 2106 is in the forward state, the game ball cannot be received, and when the movable piece 2106 is in the retracted state, the game ball can be received. It is considered as a variable prize opening.

  In addition, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that is 4-6 times longer than the diameter of the game ball in the front view and is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction, and faces forward. And a plate-like opening / closing member 2107 that can open and close the opened opening. In this special winning opening 2103, the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening / closing member 2107 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball cannot be received and the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. When the state is reached, the game ball can be received, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

  Further, the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, like the first start port 2101, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. ing. Further, the gate unit 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that the game ball can flow in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker unit 2100 according to this embodiment will be described in further detail. The attacker unit 2100 includes a first unit 2110 having a first start port 2101 and a big prize opening 2103, a second start port 2102 and a gate portion 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which a function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit. The unit base 2150 that supports 2140 from the rear side, the attacker solenoid 2113, the start port solenoid 2124, the count sensor 2114, and the second start port sensor 2125 that are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150 are connected to the panel relay board 3025. Relay to relay And mosquitoes unit relay board 2160, and a.

  The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plate-like first base 2111 that has a first start opening 2101 and an opening 2111a that faces the prize winning opening 2103 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a first base 2111. A box-shaped first that is attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so that the grand prize opening 2103 faces from the opening of the box and that has the big prize opening 2103 and rotatably supports an opening / closing member 2107 that opens and closes the big prize opening 2103. A case 2112, an attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for driving the opening / closing member 2107 to open and close, and a count sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball supported in the first case 2112 and received in the big prize opening 2103. And a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface disposed on the rear side of the first case 2112 Is provided with a winning hole decorative substrate 2115, the.

  The first unit 2110 includes a middle object detection sensor 2116 attached to the lower side of the first start port 2101 on the front surface of the first base 2111 and a front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the medium induction decoration member 2117 attached and having a predetermined decoration, and mounted on the rear side of the first base 2111 at positions corresponding to the medium object detection sensor 2116 and the medium induction decoration member 2117. And an attacker inner decoration board 2118. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

  The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first start port 2101 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 5a) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and that opens upward and rearward. When attached to the game panel 1150, the game panel 1150 extends to a position substantially coincident with the rear surface. As a result, the game ball received in the first start port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with the front side opened, and is divided into an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b. In addition, the first case 2112 includes a discharge port member 2112c that receives the game ball detected by the count sensor 2114 from the predetermined position and is received in the big winning opening 2103. The first case 2112 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and guides light from the big prize opening decoration board 2115 arranged on the rear side to the opening / closing member 2107 side to open or close the big prize opening 2103. The member 2107 can be decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves forward and backward. The attacker solenoid 2113 can rotate the opening / closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves forward and backward by energization. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 includes a spring that biases the plunger forward (protrudes), and the opening / closing member 2107 closes the big prize opening 2103 while the plunger is advanced. It comes to be a position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger is retracted (immersed), and the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from the closed position to the open position so that the game ball can be received in the big prize opening 2103. It has become.

  Although not shown in detail, the middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves in the vertical direction rather than the object moving in the left-right direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect.

  The middle guiding decorative member 2117 of the first unit 2110 has a front surface decorated with a downward arrow in a circle, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. A cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2117a is provided. Accordingly, the inner decoration board 2118 disposed on the rear side of the middle guiding decoration member 2117 can be decorated with light emission in a different manner between the inner side and the outer side of the arrow.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a plate-like second base 2121 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a front side of the game panel 1150 attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 (in the game area 5a). A passage forming member 2122 that protrudes toward the second forming the second starting port 2102 and the gate portion 2105 and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opens and closes the second starting port 2102 are slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a start-up solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 for driving the movable piece 2106 to open and close are provided.

  Further, the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 receives the game balls supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and received in the second starting port 2102 as shown in FIGS. A second start port sensor 2125 for detecting, a gate sensor 2126 for detecting a game ball supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and passing through the gate portion 2105, and disposed on the rear side of the second base 2121. And a second start port decoration board 2127 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a light shielding member having a plurality of openings arranged between the second start port decoration board 2127 and the second base 2121 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 2128.

  The second unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 constitutes a part of a function display board 1191 in which a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs is mounted on the front surface at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121. A normal symbol display board 1191a is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 has a substantially entire front surface formed into a flat surface along the surface of the game panel 1150, and cooperates with the passage forming member 2122. Thus, a passage through which game balls can be distributed can be formed on the front side. The second base 2121 includes a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass in the lower left corner when viewed from the front, and a recess 2121b recessed in a curved shape near the upper right corner when viewed from the front. . Further, the second base 2121 has an opening through which the plate-shaped movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support portion 2121c for supporting the second start port sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and a substrate for supporting the normal symbol display substrate 1191a. A support portion 2121d, a wall portion 2121e that extends forward from the right end of the substrate support portion 2121d in front view and covers the right side of the normal symbol display 1189, and the like are provided. Note that the second base 2121 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The second base 2121 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 has a portion in which the shape in front view has a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending in the left direction from the lower end thereof. It is formed in an L shape. The passage forming member 2122 includes a first passage 2122a that allows a game ball to flow in the vertical direction at a position of a portion extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and has an upper end and a lower end opened. The passage forming member 2122 allows the game ball to flow in the left-right direction at a position extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the right end side opens upward at a position substantially opposite to the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. A second passage 2122b whose left end is closed is provided. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are spaced apart in the vertical direction by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The passage forming member 2122 includes a plate-like wall portion 2122c that connects the lower end of the right side wall of the first passage 2122a and the right end of the right end opening of the second passage 2122b, and the first upper portion of the wall portion 2122c. A right outlet 2122d that opens to the right side surface of the passage 2122a in front view and through which a game ball can pass; a right shelf 2122e that extends short from the lower end of the right outlet 2122d toward the right side in front view; A left discharge part 2122f that is formed on the opposite side across the first passage 2122a from the lower end on the left side of the first passage 2122a and the upper end of the second passage 2122b and through which the game ball can pass, A left shelf portion 2122g which is continuous with the lower end of the second passage 2122f and is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and which is inclined to the left when viewed from the front, and in the first passage 2122a And a, a guide wall 2122h projecting rearwardly from the front wall at a height position definitive right outlet 2122d are formed.

  In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a is a gate portion 2105, and the right end opening of the second passage 2122b is a second starting port 2102. The passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the first passage 2122a and above the right discharge port 2122d, and flows through the first passage 2122a. The game ball being played can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

  112, the right end opening of the second passage 2122b extends from the front surface of the second base 2121 to the front side in the assembled state as the second unit 2120. It is formed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 2106 provided, and the right end side opening is the second starting port 2102. As a result, unless the movable piece 2106 moves backward, the movable piece 2106 is prevented from receiving the game ball into the second start port 2102. The game ball blocked in this way is discharged from the second unit 2120 through the left shelf 2122g from the left outlet 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the big prize opening 2103. Will head.

  On the other hand, when the game piece is received in the second start port 2102 by the movement of the movable piece 2106 to the rear side, the game ball flows down the second passage 2122b and is detected by the second start port sensor 2125. The After that, the game ball is discharged from the left end portion of the second passage 2122b to the rear side of the second unit 2120 (the rear side of the game panel 1150) through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the rear side. (Emission) comes to be.

  In addition, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the normal symbol display board 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a portion below the right shelf 2122e.

  The second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 has a bottom wall positioned directly below the right end opening when viewed from the front, and is formed in an arc shape so that the game ball passing through the right end opening (second start port 2102) can be smoothly passed. Can be distributed in the left direction. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a in the passage forming member 2122 is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b in the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to become lower toward the rear. The game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

  The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with the front side open, and can be divided into an upper case 2123a and a lower case 2123b. The upper case 2123a and the lower case 2123b The movable piece 2106 can be slidably supported in the front-rear direction. In addition to the movable piece 2106 and the start port solenoid 2124, the second case 2123 includes a link member 2129 that transmits the movement of the plunger that advances and retreats in the vertical direction of the start port solenoid 2124 to move the movable piece 2106 back and forth. Supporting inside.

  The start port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger moves forward and backward, and the plunger protrudes downward in a normal state (when not energized). In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 protrudes forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger in the start port solenoid 2124, and the second start port 2102. The game ball is prevented from being accepted. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger tip rises so as to be immersed, and the movable piece 2106 is moved rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the plunger tip. It will move backward, and it will be in the state which can accept the game ball to the 2nd starting port 2102 here.

  The second unit 2120 includes a plurality of rectangular openings 2128 a arranged in the left-right direction on the light shielding member 2128, and each opening 2128 a of the light shielding member 2128 is provided on the front surface of the second start port decoration board 2127. LEDs are mounted so as to correspond to each other, and each of the openings 2128a can be decorated with light emission.

  When the game ball enters the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), the second unit 2120 passes through the gate sensor 2126 and is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guide wall 2122h inclined backward. After being once sent into 2121b, it returns again from the inside of the recess 2121b into the first passage 2122a and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the game ball meanders by the guide wall 2122h and the concave portion 2121b, and the flow velocity of the game ball is attenuated so that the movable piece 2106 and the second passage arranged on the downstream side are attenuated. It is possible to reduce the impact applied when contacting 2122a.

  Thus, in this example, as shown in FIG. 112 as well, the passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126, and when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, A normal lottery is performed and a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn. If the selected lottery result is a win, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front surface of the second base 2121 by driving the start opening solenoid 2124, the second start opening 2102 is opened, and a game ball can be received. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a enters the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b circulates in the left direction when viewed from the front by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and is detected by the second start port sensor 2125, and then rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b. The second unit 2120 is discharged (discharged) to the rear side (rear side of the game panel 1150) through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball until the movable piece 2106 is slid by driving the start port solenoid 2124 and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2102 is reached. If the normal lottery result when the movable piece 2106 is in the short-time state is hit by the operation of the movable piece 2106, the lottery is triggered. The game ball is received in the second start port 2102. In addition, the start-up solenoid 2124 is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) for one hit when the time is short, and when the predetermined time elapses, the start-up solenoid 2124 is driven. The driving of the solenoid 2124 is finished, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second start port 2102 is closed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the normal lottery is lost, the start opening solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains moving forward, and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is moved to the movable piece 2106. This prevents entry into the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball whose movement into the second starting port 2102 is blocked by the movable piece 2106 circulates from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf portion 2122g, and left It is discharged from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1150). Note that the movable piece 2106 is inclined such that the upper surface of the movable piece 2106 is lowered on the left side of the front, and even if the game ball stays on the movable piece 2106, the inclination of the game ball naturally rolls to the left in the front view. It is discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

  In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game ball may be released from the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a, and is released from the right discharge port 2122d. The game ball passes through the right shelf 2122e and is released from the right end of the right shelf 2122e into the game area 5a.

  Further, the third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 has a general winning opening 2104 that can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 in front view. A third base 2131, a lens member 2132 that is inserted from the rear side into the through hole of the third base 2131, is attached to the third base 2131, and has translucency, and is disposed on the rear side of the lens member 2132. And a gate decoration substrate 2133 on which LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 is integrally formed with a general winning port 2104 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 5a) from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and that opens upward and rearward, with the rear end being a game. When attached to the panel 1150, it extends to a position substantially coincident with the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150. The third base 2131 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The gate decoration board 2133 of the third unit 2130 can make the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 be illuminated by the lens member 2132 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light appropriately. . The gate decoration substrate 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a plate-like fourth base 2141 to which the function display board 1191 is attached to the lower rear surface, and to the upper front surface of the fourth base 2141 and the game panel. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a that protrudes forward (inside the game area 5a) from the front surface of 1150 and guides the game ball in the left-right direction, and disposed below the guide passage 2142a in the guide passage member 2142. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and a right guide decoration member 2144 having a predetermined decoration attached to the guide passage member 2142 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143. And.

  The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an oblique side at the left end substantially arc-shaped along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 5a. The fourth base 2141 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2141a at the lower portion thereof, on which the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191 face each other. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side of the fourth base 2141 extending in the left-right direction. The right end of the front view opens upward, the left end opens downward, and the guide passage 2142a through which game balls can flow is distributed. It has. The guide passage 2142 a of the guide passage member 2142 is closed at the front side and opened at the rear side, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. In addition, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side when viewed from the front is lowered.

  In addition, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is in the assembled state so that the right end when viewed from the front is positioned close to the inner periphery of the game area 5a, and flows down along the right inner periphery of the game area 5a. The game ball that has been moved enters the inside from the right end side opening. Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward on the left end side when viewed from the front, and the left end opening opened downward in the assembled state as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed so as to be located immediately above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and the front surface corresponding to the guide passage 2142a in the fourth base 2141, protrusions extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the game balls are moved in the front-rear direction in the guide passage 2142a. The circulation speed can be attenuated by meandering to the right. The left end opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the left and right direction rather than the object that moves in the vertical direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect. The fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

  The right guide decorative member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 has a decoration in which a right-pointing arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface. On the rear side of the right guiding decorative member 2144, a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2146 is provided in which a wall along the decorative shape of the right guiding decorative member 2144 extends rearward. Thus, the back right lower decorative substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the right guide decorative member 2144 can be decorated with light emission in different manners on the inside and outside of the arrow.

  The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open. The unit base 2150 also includes a discharge port 2150a that receives the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 2121b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharges it from the rear surface of the unit base 2150 to the rear.

  In the state where the attacker unit 2100 of this example is arranged in the game area 5a, the first start port 2101 is located at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1151 with the middle guide decoration member 2117 interposed therebetween. The special winning opening 2103 is positioned approximately at the center in the left-right direction between the first start opening 2101 and the inner right side in the game area 5a.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the first start port 2101 is located immediately above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. Thereby, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be received at the first start port 2101 with high probability. The game ball received in the first start port 2101 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guide passage 3071 of the back left guide member 3070 in the back unit 3000 described later. Yes.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be positioned on the right side of the prize winning opening 2103 when viewed from the front, and the right end portion (the right end portion of the function display unit 1180) is located on the right side in the game area 5a. It is located slightly inside (left side) from the circumference. Thereby, the game ball flowing down from above along the right inner periphery of the game area 5a falls on the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 and opens upward on the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided to the left in the front view by the guide passage 2142a, and is released downward immediately above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, directly above the gate portion 2105. ing. The game ball released downward from the left end opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with a very high probability.

  The game ball that has entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided rearward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 disposed in the first passage 2122a, and the second The base 2121 enters the recess 2121b. Then, the game ball that has entered the recess 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121b and comes into contact with the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122 to flow downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is necessarily guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2106 while meandering in the front-rear direction.

  In this example, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is immediately performed, and the selected lottery result is instantly displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. When the selected lottery result is a win, the start opening solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward so that a game ball can be received in the second start opening 2102. Accordingly, the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 are accepted into the second start port 2102 with a very high probability when the winning lottery is selected as a normal lottery result.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting port 2102 and is sent to the left in the front view and detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. The course is changed rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. .

  If the result of the normal lottery is lost, the game ball released downward from the first passage 2122a comes into contact with the movable piece 2106 that closes the second start port 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b. Is discharged from the left discharge port 2122f between the two to the left shelf 2122g on the upper side of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g in the left direction when viewed from the front, from the left end of the left shelf 2122g to the game area 5a Is discharged to the upper region of the special winning opening 2103.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is responsive to a special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 (for example, “6R probability variation big hit A on the first start port 2101 side”. , 6R-accurate big hit B, 6R normal big hit ", and on the 2nd start port 2102 side," 2R-accurate big hit, 4R-accurate big hit, 8R-accurate big hit, 16R-accurate big hit A, 16R-accurate big hit B, 2R normal big hit " 1), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the opening / closing member 2107 is rotated from the upright closed position to the open position where it is substantially horizontal by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113. The game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then discharged below the attacker unit 2100.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning port 2104 disposed between the first start port 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then a back unit described later. In 3000, the back right guide member 3060 is sent from the upper opening 3061 into the right guide passage.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Next, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 113A is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 113B is a perspective view of the front side unit viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is located on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 5a on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and on the lower side from the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front).

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 5a, and is arranged in a line along the arc from the right end of the front view to the left. It mainly includes three general winning holes 2201 and a shelf 2202 that is disposed at the upper left of the three general winning holes 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The three general winning holes 2201 of the front side unit 2200 have a front end that extends forward from the front of the game panel 1150 and a rear end that extends rearward from the rear of the game panel 1150. In the game area 5a, a game ball is formed so as to be always received.

  The shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the left inner periphery of the game area 5a, and has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball can be guided rightward.

  The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-like unit base 2210 having three general winning holes 2201, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, a guide member 2211 having a shelf 2202 formed at the upper end, and a left object detection sensor 2212 that is disposed on the right side of the guide member 2211 and on the lower side of the right end of the shelf 2202 and attached to the front of the unit base 2210 The left guide decoration member 2213 having a predetermined decoration attached to the guide member 2211 so that the front surface is exposed forward on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212 and the front side of the unit base 2210 are opened. A shallow box-shaped transparent unit cover 2214.

  The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-like portion that contacts the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a frame-like shape that extends backward from the plate-like portion and is inserted into a corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150. And is attached to the game panel 1150 at a plate-like part. The unit base 2210 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface and is formed so as to be partially translucent.

  The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a shelf 2202 that is linearly inclined so that the right side is lower on the upper side. The guide member 2211 has a circular through hole into which the left guide decorative member 2213 is inserted at a substantially central position.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object positioned within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212 moves in the left-right direction rather than the object moving in the vertical direction. The object to be operated is easier to detect.

  The left guide decorative member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a front surface decorated with a left-pointing arrow arranged in a circle, and a wall along the outer periphery of the front decoration extends rearward. A cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2213a is provided. Note that the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a extends to a position slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the attached state. Accordingly, the LED on the back left lower decorative substrate 3020 in the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guide decorative member 2213 can be decorated with light emission in a manner different from the inside and the outside of the arrow.

  The unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and is formed with a depth such that the rear end is located slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in the attached state. ing. This unit cover 2214 has a through-hole through which the light shielding member 2213a of the left guide decorative member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a faces rearward.

  The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the game ball flowing down the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 5a to the right by the shelf 2202 and is downstream of the shelf 2202. The game balls can be received by the three general winning ports 2201 arranged in the box. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guide member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guide passage. It is to be delivered.

[2-4. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 126. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the upper right front, FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed obliquely from the lower left front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. is there. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory broken down for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the center role broken down for each major member and viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the front right middle effect unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the front right middle effect unit of the center character as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle effect unit as seen from the rear.

  The center accessory 2500 in this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150 and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 92 and the like, a large window portion 2501 is provided that is visible in a liquid crystal display device 1900 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 5a. ing.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange portion 2502a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and swells forward from the unit base 2502 to approximately the center in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall 2503 for guiding the game ball flowing down in the game area 5a as a boundary to the left and right and preventing the game ball from entering the frame (inside the window 2501) is provided. Part of the peripheral wall 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has entered a warp inlet 2504 (see FIG. 94) that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 5a to enter, and enters the warp inlet 2504. A warp outlet 2505 that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction and then is released into the game area 5a above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window 2501.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and has a transparent plate-like partition wall member 2520 that closes the window portion 2501, and on the left side and lower side of the window portion 2501 on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503. A center lower decorative board 2521 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, a center upper decorative board 2522 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall 2503 above the window 2501, and a unit An upper flange member 2523 that is attached to the rear upper surface of the base 2502 in the front view and forms a part of the flange portion 2502a, and a left rear decoration member 2524 that is attached to the left side of the unit base 2502 in the front view and decorates the inside of the frame. It is equipped with.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the right side of the stage 2510 when viewed from the front, and a game ball is received at the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes. The start condition for display has been established, but the start condition for changing the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has not yet been met (the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol)) End of variable display, end of jackpot gaming state) Number of special symbols held (start number of special symbols, number of second special symbols held) that is the number of established start conditions, and game balls pass through the gate part 2105 and normal symbols The start condition for the normal display of the variable symbol is satisfied, but the start condition for the normal symbol variable display has not yet been satisfied (the previous normal symbol variable display has ended, the jackpot game state has ended). Design hold count) A displayable number-of-holds indicator 2530, a center decoration member 2540 on which the number-of-holds indicator 2530 is arranged and attached to the front side of the unit base 2502 to decorate the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the upper peripheral wall portion of the window portion 2501 A front stage production unit 2550 that is arranged at 2503 and has a predetermined logo decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and that can be illuminated by a decorative board 2522 on the center. The front right middle effect unit 2600 having the front right movable decoration body 2610 movable according to the state (special lottery result) and the outer right movable decoration body 2610 in the front right middle effect unit 2600 are arranged so as to surround the outer periphery. A front right outside effect unit 2700 having a predetermined decoration.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is capable of rolling in the left-right direction. The first stage 2511 can discharge the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. The first stage 2511 is arranged in front of the first stage 2511 so that a game ball is supplied and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and the supplied game ball can be discharged from a predetermined position into the front game area 5a. The game area 5a from the second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 in which the game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2513 from the position below the second stage 2512 A chance exit 2514 that can be discharged into the interior.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that both left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a is higher. It is formed in a wave shape. The first stage 2511 is formed at a heightened portion in the center in the left-right direction, and is lowered toward the front and widened in the left-right direction, and is lowest on both the left and right sides of the center discharge portion 2511a. And a side discharge portion 2511b which is formed in a part and becomes lower toward the front and whose width in the left-right direction is wider than the central discharge portion 2511a.

  In the first stage 2511, the front ends other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b protrude upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. . In addition, the first stage 2511 extends rightward so that the right end side in front view bites into the holding number display 2530 side.

  The second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side discharge portions 2511b in the first stage 2511 and to be lowered in the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is slightly higher in the center in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the center position in the left-right direction and is lowered toward the rear, and the width is increased in the left-right direction. The second stage 2512 is formed at the lowest portion on both the left and right sides of the center guide portion 2512a. And a side discharge portion 2512b having a width in the left-right direction wider than that of the center guide portion 2512a. In the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharge portion 2512b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the side discharge portion 2512b.

  A chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 opens forward in a wall-like portion extending between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 and extending in the vertical direction, and a central guide portion 2512a in the second stage 2512. It is arranged on the back side. Thereby, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided backward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

  The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed so as to open toward the front at a position below the center in the left-right direction of the second stage 2512 in the flange portion 2502a. The chance outlet 2514 includes a pair of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction and spaced apart in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. Thereby, the game ball released from the chance outlet 2514 is released into the game area 5a in a state in which the swinging in the left-right direction is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. Yes.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 has a chance exit 2514 in an assembled state so as to be positioned immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and a game ball is placed in the game area 5a from the chance exit 2514. Is released into the first start port 2101 with a high probability.

  Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely formed of a transparent member, and can be decorated with light emission by the center lower decorative substrate 2521. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515 and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

  Further, the number-of-holds display 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes a number-of-holds display board 2531 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and LEDs on the number-of-holds display board 2531 arranged on the front surface of the number-of-holds display board 2531. A grid-shaped light shielding member 2532 to be partitioned, a light guide member 2533 which is disposed in each lattice of the light shielding member 2532 and guides light from the LEDs of the reserved number display board 2531 forward, and each light guide member 2533 forward. A front cover 2534 having a plurality of facing openings and disposed on the front side of the light shielding member 2532, a front cover 2534, a light shielding member 2532, and an upper surface cover 2535 covering the upper side of the reserved number display substrate 2531 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the upper surface cover 2535 of the reserved number indicator 2530 is formed in an arc shape that is inclined so that the left end side when viewed from the front is lowered and the center in the left-right direction is bulged upward. The top cover 2535 is disposed between the stage 2510 and the front right middle effect unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610), and the game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle effect unit 2600 side. Can be returned to the stage 2510 side. The top cover 2535 is formed integrally with the unit base 2502.

  The front effect unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is omitted in detail about the decoration, but the upper decorative member 2551 having a translucent logo formed in a shallow relief shape in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A plate-shaped diffusion light guide member 2552 disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member 2551 and capable of diffusing light, and a logo decoration substrate 2553 disposed on the upper side of the diffusion light guide member 2552 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower surface thereof. It is equipped with. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the upper decorative member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The front effect unit 2550 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting the LED of the logo decoration board 2553.

  The front right middle production unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 has a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an annular rotary decorative body 2630 that surrounds the outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 and is rotatable. The right middle movable decorative body 2610, the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the rear right middle decorative board 2640 are arranged. A rotary drive mechanism 2650 for rotating and driving the rotary decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and the rear drive unit 2650, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are supported. A base member 2660 supported rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and rotation for rotating the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range Is provided with a moving mechanism 2670, the. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by support pins 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is a transparent front decorative body 2621 whose outer periphery is circular and whose front surface bulges forward and whose front surface is indefinitely penetrated in the front-rear direction. And a disc-shaped post-decorative body 2622 having a translucency, which is disposed inside the front-decoration body 2621 and has a front surface that swells forward more loosely than the front surface of the front-decoration body 2621 and has predetermined characters embossed on the front surface. It is equipped with. Note that the front right middle decorative board 2640 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622 so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be decorated with light emission. Yes.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 having a plurality of partitioning pieces 2623a that are arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and project radially. In addition, the front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621a that project radially from the outer periphery and are respectively disposed between the partition pieces 2623a of the light shielding member 2623. The front end of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The partition piece 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are positioned inside the rotary decorative body 2630. The front right middle decorative board 2640 has an LED mounted on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, and the front end of the lens portion 2621a formed in a star shape can be decorated with light emission. .

  The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 via an annular spacer member 2624 in a state where the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are sandwiched. It has become.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is formed in an annular shape, and a predetermined decoration is three-dimensionally formed on the surface, and the decorations are penetrated in the front-rear direction. ing. The rotating decorative body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are opened, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the fixed decorative body 2620, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative board 2640 are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotating decorative body 2630 has a rear end that extends rearward from the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 and is attached to an annular operating gear 2654 of a rotation driving mechanism 2650 described later, so that the rotating decorative body 2630 can rotate with respect to the base member 2660. Has come to be supported.

  The rotating decorative body 2630 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED located on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 on the front right middle decorative board 2640.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2650 of the front right middle production unit 2600 includes a table first drive motor 2651 attached to the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotation decoration body 2630, and a table first drive motor 2651. A driving gear 2652 fixed to the rotation shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshing with the driving gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and meshing with the transmission gear 2653 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660 And an annular operating gear 2654 to which the rotating decorative body 2630 is attached.

  The front first drive motor 2651 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotation shaft extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. The drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are disposed between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

  The operation gear 2654 of the rotation drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The operation gear 2654 is disposed between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported by a guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. .

  The rotational drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotational position detection sensor 2655 that can detect the rotational position of the rotational decoration body 2630. The rotational drive mechanism 2650 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 2651 a that extends outwardly from the drive gear 2652, and the rotational position of the rotary decoration body 2630 is detected by detecting the detection piece 2652 a with the rotational position detection sensor 2655. Can be detected.

  The base member 2660 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and the rotation drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 includes an arm portion 2661 extending upward from a portion that supports the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right, and a bearing that is formed at the tip of the arm portion 2661 and is rotatably supported with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 that is formed on the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the portion that supports the bearing portion 2662 and the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and extends long along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And. The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached to the bearing portion 2662 so as to extend rearward on the rear side of the unit base 2502 is inserted, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It is like that.

  The motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 includes a guide piece 2664 extending in an arc shape around the bearing portion 2662 at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610. . The guide piece 2664 has a plate-like portion extending in the front-rear direction at the outer peripheral end centered on the bearing portion 2662, and is in an arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. To be inserted. Thus, the guide piece 2664 suppresses the shaking in the front-rear direction when the base member 2660 is rotated.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is positioned on an extension line on the right side of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 on the right side when viewed from the front. Accordingly, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotated from the normal position to the appearance position in the leftward direction when viewed from the front by the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper right end of the first stage 2511. Therefore, even if the game ball bounces from the first stage 2511 in the right direction, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the rotating decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being spoiled by the rotating rotating decorative body 2630, thereby preventing the original movement of the game ball from being impaired and causing the player to feel distrust. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined such that the left end side surface in front view is lowered at the left end. As a result, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520 are positioned below the rotary decorative body 2630. Since a space that can accommodate a game ball can be formed, even if the game ball deviates from the right end side of the first stage 2511 in the right direction, the game ball is accommodated and held in the space described above to move the game ball. Can be stopped, and the game ball can be prevented from moving differently from the original.

  Note that the game ball accommodated and held in the above-described space is moved (rotated) from the normal position to the left position in the front view by moving (rotating) the front / right middle movable decorative body 2610 obliquely at the left end of the guide piece 2664. Due to the side face, it rolls leftward (in the direction of the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed at which the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the normal position to the appearance position, it is possible to fly the game ball accommodated and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 to the stage 2510 side (see FIG. 140). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center actor 2500, and the entertainment is lowered by making the player enjoy the movement of the game medium. Can be suppressed.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2670 of the front right middle production unit 2600 is attached to the rotation shaft of the table second drive motor 2671 and the table second drive motor 2671 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 so that the rotation shaft extends in the front-rear direction. A disk-shaped link wheel 2672 to be fixed, and a link pin 2673 supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660 are provided.

  The rotation drive mechanism 2670 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2673 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detects the rotation position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2684 is attached at a position where the right end in front view of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, when the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the table second drive motor 2671, the link pin 2673 revolves on the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pin 2673 revolves. At the same time that the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates around the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). Yes.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the link pin 2673 is disposed between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, so the front right middle movable decorative body is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. 2610 can be moved greatly. The front right middle production unit 2600 of this example has a normal position where the front right middle decorative body 2610 is positioned on the right side in front view of the window portion 2501 and the center side in front view of the window portion 2501 by the rotational movement mechanism 2670. It can be made to rotate between the appearance positions located in the.

  The link wheel 2672 of the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is positioned on the front side of the partition wall member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface faces the window 2501 (see FIGS. 94 and 115). Thereby, an operator such as maintenance can rotate the link wheel 2672 by touching the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center accessory 2500 (game board 5). Even if a malfunction occurs in which the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than a predetermined position, the base member 2660 can be returned to the normal position by rotating the link wheel 2672 from the front side without disassembling the center accessory 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for maintenance, etc., and to reduce the time that the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a failure as much as possible, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game. It can be done.

  Further, although the detailed illustration of the front right middle production unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is omitted, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is at the rightmost position when viewed from the front, the support pin 2601 (bearing portion) 2662), a support pin 2601, a link wheel 2672, and the like are arranged so that a vertical line passing through the center of the link wheel 2672 passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. Thus, the front right middle decorative body 2610 can be rotated further leftward in a front view, and the appearance position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved closer to the center to make it easier to pay attention to the player. Be able to. Note that when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is returned from the appearance position to the normal position, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601, so the link pin 2673 During the revolution to the normal position after reaching the vertical line, the load from the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 or the like acts on the link pin 2673 to apply a load to the front second drive motor 2671, and the front right middle movable decorative element. Although the body 2610 may not be able to return to the normal position, as described above, the link pin 2673 is operated by rotating the link wheel 2672 partially exposed in the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to revolve and return the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 to the normal position.

  The front right outside direction production unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is a table having a predetermined character decoration on the front surface thereof disposed under the front right middle movable ornament 2610 with the front right middle movable ornament 2610 in the normal position. The right middle / lower decorative member 2710, the front right middle / lower decorative board 2711 disposed on the rear side of the front right middle / lower decorative member 2710 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the front right / lower middle decorative member 2710 on the front surface Front right middle upper decorative member 2720 having a decoration of different characters and arranged above the front right middle movable decorative body 2610, and between the front right middle upper decorative body 2720 and front right middle lower decorative body 2710. An arc-shaped front right middle outer periphery decorative member 2730, which is arranged so as to surround the right outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610, and widens upward, the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 and the front right middle upper Of the decorative member 2720 A plurality of LED on the front is disposed on the side is implemented as a table right in the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, and a.

  The front right middle lower decorative member 2710 of the front right outside effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has translucency, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 so that a part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed. Forming. The front right / bottom decorative member 2710 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front-reserved number display unit 2530 so as to sandwich the front right / bottom decorative board 2711. The front right / bottom decorative member 2710 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front / right / bottom decorative board 2711.

  The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has translucency, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730. The front right middle / upper decorative member 2720 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the corresponding LED on the front right middle outer periphery decorative board 2733.

  The front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700 has a circular arc shape whose width increases as the outer shape goes upward, and has a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose circumferential length increases as it goes upward. A frame member 2731; and a lens member 2732 which is disposed on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and has a block portion which is inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731 and has translucency. The front right middle outer peripheral decorative body 2730 has a frame member 2731 attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the lens member 2732 and the front right middle outer peripheral decorative board 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It has come to be. The front right middle decorative board 2733 has LEDs arranged at positions corresponding to the openings of the frame member 2731, and can be decorated with light emission for each opening (block part of the lens member 2732). Yes.

  In the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the upper side and the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 5a (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the state of being attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the clearance on the right outer periphery (so-called right hit), the game ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has a very high probability. A game ball can be passed through the portion 2105.

  In addition, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 between the inner periphery of the game region 5a. . As a result, when the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the left side of the center bonus 2500, the game ball flows down in a complex motion within the area, and a game in which the game ball can be enjoyed can be performed. It has become. Further, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the left side of the center object 2500, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the warp entrance 2504, so that the user can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. In addition, the player's expectation can be enhanced by whether or not the game ball recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 5a is received in the first start port 2101 or the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decorative body in front right middle production unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right middle effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. FIG. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right middle production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body in FIG. 123 as seen from the rear. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and the production sheet of the fixed decorative body shown in FIG. 123 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a view of (a) from a slightly left position with respect to the front. (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left than (b). 126 (a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 123, (b) is an explanatory view showing a state when the light is turned off, and (c) is a light emitting decoration mode when the light is blue. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of red lighting. In addition, about the member of the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed decorative body 2620A of this example can be replaced with the front decorative body 2621 and the rear decorative body 2622 in the fixed decorative body 2620 described above. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed in a front cover 2625, a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery and a front surface that bulges forward and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface. A thin plate-like effect sheet 2626, a thin plate-like diffusion lens sheet 2627 disposed on the rear side of the effect sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a rear cover disposed on the rear side of the diffusion lens sheet 2627. And a transparent disk-shaped holding member 2628 inserted into the inside 2626.

  In this fixed decorative body 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a light-transmitting smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film so that it looks black when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 126 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A is configured so that the relief-like decoration formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 125). As a result, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is viewed from the front without the light emitting decoration, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief reflected on the effect sheet 2626, and the distance from the front cover 2625 to the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 Due to this difference, the relief of the front cover 2625 looks more three-dimensional like a decoupage, and an unprecedented decoration can be presented to the player, as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c). Furthermore, since the appearance changes depending on the position where the player sees, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 126A, the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 includes a black portion 2626a that has little translucency, a blue portion 2626b that has translucency, and a transparent portion. It is composed of a red portion 2626c having light properties and an uncolored portion 2626d that is not colored. As a result, when the LED positioned on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A on the front right middle decorative board 2640 is not emitting light, the entire pattern becomes blackish due to the smoke color of the base film as shown in FIG. 126 (b). In contrast, when the LED emits light in blue, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 126 (c), and when it emits light in red, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 126 (d). ing.

  Specifically, the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A has a black portion that is not included in any of the patterns when the pattern in FIG. 126 (c) and the pattern in FIG. 126 (d) are overlapped. 2626a and a portion included in any of the patterns is an uncolored portion 2626d. In addition, when the pattern of FIG. 126 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 126 (d) are overlapped, the part of only the pattern of FIG. 126 (c) is the blue portion 2626b, and the pattern of FIG. 126 (d). Only the portion is a red portion 2626c. Therefore, when the LED emits blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. The simulated pattern) emits blue light. When the LED emits red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. The simulated pattern) emits red light. When the LED emits white light, a pattern as shown in FIG. 126 (a) is emitted.

  In this way, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a three-dimensional effect when the relief formed on the front cover 2625 is reflected on the effect sheet 2626 when the LED of the front right middle decorative board 2640 arranged on the rear side is not emitting light. While a certain decoration can be presented, different patterns can be displayed in a light-emitting manner according to the light emission color of the LED, and various effects can be presented to the player so that it is difficult to get bored. Note that the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern that is displayed when the LED emits blue light, so that the pattern that emits blue light together with the relief of the front cover 2625 has a stereoscopic effect. Can be granted.

[2-5. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit and the rear unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit as the main component and from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 3000 according to the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front side opened and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b that penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, the back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a rear view in the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. And a lock mechanism attaching portion 3010f to which the is attached. The back box 3010 is configured such that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d on the rear wall 3010a is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 comes into contact.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting each rendering unit 3100, 3300, 3500, a board, a cover, and the like.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010 and has a lower left decorative board 3020 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. A back lower right decorative board 3021 mounted at a position corresponding to the guide path member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front face, and attached to the front face of the rear wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. A back relay board 3022, a back right relay board 3023 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a rear wall 3010a on the left side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in front view. And a back left relay board 3024 attached to the front surface.

  Further, the back unit 3000 has a panel relay board 3025 attached to the lower left corner of the rear face of the back box 3010 on the rear face of the rear wall 3010a below the opening 3010b and the right side of the panel relay board 3025. A first drive board 3026 attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3010a in 3010, and a second drive board 3027 attached to the rear face of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010 disposed on the right side of the rear face of the first drive board 3026. ing.

  The back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the rear side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. 3031 and a second drive board cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive board 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lock mechanism 3040 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3040 in this example is attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010f of the back box 3010 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. When the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion port that can be inserted from the side is opened and the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion port and the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion port is closed and the fixing piece 1902 cannot be removed. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a plate-like back left holder 3050 that is attached near the front end at the left end in the back box 3010 and extends in the vertical direction, and a second start port of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. 2102 and the back right guiding member 3060 which can be attached to a position corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 and can guide the game ball, the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the front side unit 2200 in the vicinity of the front end in the back box 3010. And a back left guiding member 3070 that is attached to a position corresponding to the two general winning holes 2201 and can guide the game ball.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a predetermined position of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guide member 3060 and can detect magnetism, and is attached to a predetermined position of the back left guide member 3070 and the first start port 2101. The first start port sensor 3081 capable of detecting the game ball received in the game, and the game balls received in the general winning ports 2104 and 2201 mounted at predetermined positions on the back right guide member 3060 and the back left guide member 3070, respectively. And a possible general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back side effect unit 3100 disposed over the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the left and right sides, and a back effect unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And a lower back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010.

  The back left bottom decorative board 3020 of the back unit 3000 can light up and decorate the front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light. In addition, the back lower right decorative board 3021 can light-decorate the guide path member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front surface.

  The back relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the peripheral control board 4010. The back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100. The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back side relay board 3112 of the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100.

  The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 is connected to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, the main control board 4100 and the first start port sensor 3082, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general prize opening. This relay relays connections to the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the start port solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, provided in the door frame 3. 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and LED boards mounted on the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided in the game board 5 Based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, the light emission is controlled, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3, and the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, provided in the game board 5, This is for controlling the driving of 3302, 3506, and the like.

  The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp inlet 2504 in the center accessory 2500, and guides the game ball to the warp inlet 2504 using a magnet. It is possible to detect illegal acts.

  The back right guide member 3060 in the back unit 3000 is configured to support the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first start port 2101 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball is moved to the first start port using a magnet. It is possible to detect fraudulent actions that are guided to 2101.

  The back right guiding member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 that can communicate with the general winning opening 2104 on the front surface of the upper end. A middle opening 3062 capable of communicating with the second start port 2102 is provided in the front surface of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guide member 3060 includes a right guide passage that extends from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end, allows game balls to flow therethrough, and has the lower end opened downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guide passage, and game balls that have entered the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guide passage.

  As a result, the back right guiding member 3060 is received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the gaming ball guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150 enters the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061. In addition, the game ball received in the second start port 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guide passage from the middle opening 3062. In the right back guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached at a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and a game ball from the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104. Only can be detected.

  The back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 is formed so as to straddle the part where the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is arranged and the part where the three general winning ports 2201 in the front side unit 2200 are arranged. It is arranged on the rear side. A middle guide passage 3071 that extends in the vertical direction at the right end portion when viewed from the front and allows a game ball to circulate, and has an upper end portion that can communicate with the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and a left side when viewed from the front of the middle guide passage 3071 Three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning ports 2201 of the front side unit 2200 are provided.

  The middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 has a lower end opened downward, and the opened front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. Thereby, the game ball received by the first start port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guide passage 3071 from the upper end portion and is guided downward by the middle guide passage 3071 from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. A first start port sensor 3081 is attached near the upper part and the lower part of the middle guide passage 3071 so as to detect one game ball twice. That is, although details are omitted, the reception (winning) of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first start port sensors 3081. If a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, for example, it is determined that an illegal act of inserting / removing an unauthorized tool to / from the first start port 2101 is performed, and A predetermined game process is performed.

  Although not shown, the back left guide member 3070 has a left guide passage having a discharge port through which the game ball can pass at the lower end in communication with the three left openings 3072 on the left side of the middle guide passage 3071 when viewed from the front. I have. A general winning port sensor 3082 is attached to the discharge port of the left guide passage, and any one of the three general winning ports 2201 receives a game ball, and is detected by one general winning port sensor 3082. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Next, the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 138. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit divided into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit divided into the main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of one rotating decorative body unit in the back side effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136 is a perspective view of one rotating decoration body unit in the back side effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit of the back side effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decoration body unit of the back side effect unit as seen from the back. FIG.

  The back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on both the left and right sides, and is mounted on the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 is formed so that the back right effect unit 3100R and the back right effect unit 3100R arranged on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 are substantially symmetrical with respect to the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3100L, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the back right effect unit 3100R, which are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front, can be independently moved in the left-right direction, and above and below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And a back side slide unit 3150 disposed on the back side.

  The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100 are supported by the back side slide unit 3150 so that the upper and lower ends are slidable in the left-right direction, and the front side and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 are in front. A vertically long box-like back side base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction is open, and a part of each of the open front side and the side facing the center of the back side base 3110 can be covered, and the front side of the back side base 3110 A back side decorative member 3111 attached to the back side, a vertical back side relay board 3112 attached to the outer side of the back side base 3111 opposite to the open center side, and a box-like back side base 3110 And three rotating decorative body units 3120 attached in a state of being arranged in the vertical direction.

  The back horizontal base 3110 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the height in the vertical direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Further, the back horizontal base 3110 protrudes upward from the front surface at the upper end and is connected to the lower end of the right connection member 3157 or the left connection member 3162 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150, and protrudes downward from the lower end and extends in the left-right direction. And a guided portion 3110b that is inserted and guided into the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back side slide unit 3150. The back side base 3110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The back side decorative member 3111 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is in a position corresponding to each of the rotary decorative bodies 3126 of the three rotary decorative units 3120 mounted in the back horizontal base 3110. A plurality of cutout portions 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of 3126 and the side facing the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. This back side decorative member 3111 is a portion between the notches 3111a, and can hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 positioned above and below the rotating decorative body 3126 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 from the player side. It can be done.

  The back side decorative member 3111 has a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of penetrating through the front and rear directions along the decoration at positions corresponding to the back side decorative board 3130 in the rotating decorative body unit 3120. The opening 3111b is provided. Thereby, the light from the back side decoration board 3130 can be directly irradiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back side decoration member 3111.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L has a plate-like lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction, and the front of the lower base 3121 from the left-right center to the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a reverse lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation shaft extends to the lower base 3121 side. A drive gear 3124 fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 3123 and the reverse lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121. The drive gear 3124 meshes with the drive gear 3124 and has the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. A spur gear-like driven gear 3125 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121; A rotating decorative body 3126 which is attached to the upper surface of the moving gear 3125 and has a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction and whose outer periphery is formed in a substantially square shape, and the rotational position of the rotating decorative body 3126 can be detected and attached to the upper base 3122. A rotational position detection sensor 3127.

  The rotary ornament body unit 3120 includes a semi-cylindrical lens member 3128 which is inserted into the rotary ornament body 3126 from above and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 3122 and extends in the vertical direction, and the string side of the lens member 3128. A vertical rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing the lens member 3128, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the upper base 3122 at a substantially horizontal center. The back side decorative board 3130 is provided.

  The lower base 3121 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is formed so that the length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotating decorative body 3126, and on the opposite side of the drive gear 3124 with the driven gear 3125 at the left and right ends. The end is formed in a semicircular shape that is substantially concentric with the axis of the driven gear 3125. The lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft portion 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft portion 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. . The drive shaft portion 3121a is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed in the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. The driven shaft portion 3121b is inserted through a bush 3131 into a shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft core of the driven gear 3125.

  The upper base 3122 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is disposed on the side supporting the drive gear 3124 from the center in the left-right direction of the lower base 3121, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (side facing the center in the left-right direction in the opening 3010b) are opened. A box-shaped main body portion 3122a, a standing wall portion 3122b extending upward from the opened driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body portion 3122a, and a lower base 3121 from the upper end of the standing wall portion 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side. A top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotating decorative body unit 3120 of this example, a rotating decorative body 3126 that is rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction is disposed between the lower base 3121 and the top plate portion 3122 c of the upper base 3122.

  The upper base 3122 is configured such that the lower end of the main body 3122 a is attached to the lower base 3121. Further, the upper base 3122 is configured such that a back lateral rotation driving motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The standing wall portion 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends upward higher than the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body portion 3122a. The top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular tip on the side opposite to the standing wall 3122b, and a lens member 3128 is attached to the lower surface.

  Note that an annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide tube (not shown) inserted into the interior of the rotating decoration body 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. The upper guide 3132 has an outer diameter of a guide tube inserted into the interior of the rotating ornament 3126 that is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotating ornament 3126. Can be rotatably supported.

  The driving gear 3124 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotating shaft of the reverse lateral rotation driving motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear which is formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshes with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c extending in a fan shape from the substantially vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a in a direction perpendicular to the shaft, and a shaft hole recessed upward from the lower surface side at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown) ) And. The drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121 so that the rotation shaft core of the gear portion 3124b arranged far from the back side rotation drive motor 3123 does not easily swing. It has become. The detection piece 3124c is detected by a rotational position detection sensor 3127 attached in the main body 3122a of the upper base 3122. The rotation decoration body 3126 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124. The rotation position of can be detected.

  As shown in the figure, the rotating decorative body 3126 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer periphery extends in the vertical direction of a substantially square shape. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction with the center as a substantially axial center. The rotating decorative body 3126 has translucency and has different decorations on the four outer surfaces.

  The lens member 3128 and the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3129 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the assembled state. The entire vertical direction of 3126 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly. Note that the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross section has a left and right side of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010 with respect to a surface (surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150) whose chord direction extends in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state of being inclined so that the central side in the direction is retracted (for example, in a state of being inclined about 30 degrees in plan view). As a result, the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3129 attached to the string side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side so that the player can feel brighter when the rotating decorative body 3126 is decorated with light emission. It has become.

  The back side decorative board 3130 of the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is attached on the front surface side of the main body 3122a in the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the standing wall 3122b. The back side decorative board 3130 is configured to allow the back side decorative member 3111 to emit light from the rear side by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  As shown in the drawing, the rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the present embodiment, when assembled, faces out of the four faces of the outer periphery of the rotating decorative body 3126 on the side opposite to the center in the left-right direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Except for, three sides can be exposed. In addition, the rotating decorative body unit 3120 is configured such that the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are mounted in the back lateral base 3110, respectively.

  The rotating decoration body unit 3120 is formed symmetrically with respect to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L.

  The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side production unit 3100 is attached to a position above the opening 3010b near the front end in the back box 3010, and extends in the left-right direction so as to extend over substantially the entire width. The unit base 3151 The rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 that is attached to the upper rear portion near the right end of the front view of the front and extends through the unit base 3151 to the front and the flat fixed to the rotary shaft of the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152. A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 when viewed from the front, and a first transmission gear 3154. The first transmission gear 3154 is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side when viewed from the front. It has a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155 meshing with it and a rack gear 3156a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the second transmission gear 3155. A plate-like right slider 3156 supported so as to be slidable in the direction, and a right connecting member having an upper end attached to the lower end of the right slider 3156 and a lower end attached to the slider attaching portion 3110a of the back side base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R 3157.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a right slide position detection sensor 3158 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left and right direction slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects a slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the right slider 3156. Can be done.

  The back side slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and passes through the unit base 3151 and has a back side left slide drive motor 3159 extending forward. , A spur gear-like drive gear 3160 fixed to the rotating shaft of the back side left slide drive motor 3159, and a rack gear 3161 a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the drive gear 3160, and below the drive gear 3160 in the unit base 3151 A plate-like left slider 3161 that is slidably supported in the left-right direction at the position of the front side, and an upper end is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161 and a lower end is a slider attachment portion of the back side base 3110 in the back left effect unit 3100L And a left connecting member 3162 attached to 3110a.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a left slide position detection sensor 3163 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and can detect the left and right slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects a slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the left slider 3161. Can be done.

  The back side slide unit 3150 includes a plate-like unit cover 3165 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151 and covers the front sides of the drive gears 3153 and 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161, and the like.

  Further, the back side slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, the upper side is opened, and the right side of the back right effect unit 3100R is guided to be slidable in the left and right direction. The lower guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, opens the upper side, and extends in the left-right direction to guide the lower end of the back left rendering unit 3100L to be slidable in the left-right direction. 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are slidably inserted into the guided portion 3110b of the back side base 3110 in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L from above. The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L can be guided to be slidable in the left-right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are respectively provided from rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed to extend in the left and right directions at the upper ends, and from the left and right ends near the center in the left and right direction of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. A detection piece (not shown) extending upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) formed with the rear side open and extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in parallel in the up-down direction are provided. Yes.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into the guide grooves on the rear surface. Can be slid left and right. The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

  The back side slide unit 3150 of the back side extension unit 3100 rotates the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to move the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Can be independently slid in the left and right directions. Thus, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect are provided via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid in the left-right direction.

  The back side effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is rotatable about an axis extending in the up and down direction, respectively, to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L that are spaced apart in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The three rotating decoration bodies 3126 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the same axis, and the rotating decoration bodies 3126 arranged in the vertical direction are opposed to each other in the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Is arranged. The back side effect unit 3100 of this example uses the back side slide unit 3150 to move the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L between the positions farthest apart (retreat position) and the positions closest to each other (appearance position). Each can be slid in the left-right direction independently. In the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are farthest apart, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are located outside the front view of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500, respectively. The player cannot see from the player side (see FIG. 92, etc.). This state is a normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the back side effect unit 3100 is in a state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to positions closest to each other, the rotational decoration bodies 3126 supported so as to be rotatable are respectively centered. The three rotating decorative bodies 3126 that are located on the inner side of the window portion 2501 in the accessory 2500 and viewed from the player side and arranged vertically are visible (see FIG. 141). Further, in the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are closest to each other, the width of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately larger than the normal state. It is designed to be half the size.

  The back side production unit 3100 is movable in accordance with a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving game balls into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102.

[2-7. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130.

  The back effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged on the rear side of the unit base 3151 of the back side slide unit 3150 in the back side effect unit 3100. Yes. This rear effect unit 3300 is mounted in a back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction, and is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3301 in the vicinity of the left end of the front view. A back-side drive motor 3302 extending to the back, a spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft of the back-side drive motor 3302, and a rack gear meshing with the drive gear and extending in an arc shape And an arcuate plate-like slider (not shown) supported by the unit base so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the back rendering unit 3300 includes a back decorative body base 3305 attached to the front surface of a slider (not shown), a back decorative body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back decorative body base 3305 and provided with a predetermined decoration, A back decoration board (not shown) which is disposed between the back decoration body 3306 and the back decoration base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Further, the back rendering unit 3300 is disposed on the rear side of the back decorative body base 3305 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301, and covers the front surface of the drive gear and the slider, and the unit base cover. 3308 and the unit base 3301 are supported in a predetermined position at the front end and the rear end, and are supported by three cylindrical shaft members extending in the front-rear direction (not shown) and rotatably inserted into the respective shaft members. And a plurality of bushes (not shown) that can come into contact with the slider. In this back rendering unit 3300, a slider is supported so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

  The back effect unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and a slide position detection sensor (not shown) that can detect the slide position of the slider. A backside relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026 is provided.

  The back rendering unit 3300 is provided with magnets at the right side end in front view of the back top decorative body base 3305 and the right end portion in front view of the unit base 3301, although not shown, and attracts each other. Installed in the direction.

  Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the rear effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side open, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Although not shown, the unit base 3301 includes three shaft holes that penetrate the predetermined position in the front-rear direction and into which a rear end of a shaft member (not shown) is inserted.

  Although not shown, the drive gear of the back rendering unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about 2/3 of the height of the unit base 3301, and is a large spur gear. It is considered as a gear.

  Although not shown, the slider of the back rendering unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width. A rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is arranged. In addition, the slider is formed at both ends in the circumferential direction for attaching the backside decorative body base 3305, a slit that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially radial center, and extends in the circumferential direction, and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plate-like detection piece formed on the outer right end of the rack gear as viewed from the front.

  The slider of the rear effect unit 3300 is configured such that a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by the shaft hole of the unit base 3301 abuts on the radially inner circumferential surface and slit. The bush that is in contact with it can be smoothly slid in the circumferential direction by rotating. Further, the slider has both ends of the slit closed, and the bush is brought into contact with the circumferential end of the slit so that the sliding range of the slider in the circumferential direction is regulated. Further, the slider of the back effect unit 3300 can detect the detection piece by the slide position detection sensor, and the slider, that is, the slide position of the back decorative body can be detected by detecting the detection piece. It can be done.

  Although not shown in detail, the back decorative body base 3305 of the back top effect unit 3300 is formed to extend along the slider in front view, the left end side in front view is attached to the left end of the slider, and the right end side is the unit. The base cover 3308 is attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown). The back decorative body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the substantially center in the left-right direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and has an outer shape that conforms to the outer shape of the back decorative body 3306.

  The back decoration unit 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape that imitates a clenched fist, and includes a light-transmitting decoration part 3306a at a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See FIG. 142). The backside decorative body 3306 is formed in a state close to opaqueness except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Although illustration is omitted, the color as the decoration applied to the front surface of the back decorative body 3306 is a color that becomes lighter (darker) as the distance from the outer periphery increases.

  The back decorative board of the back effect unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a on the front surface. As a result, the outer periphery of the back decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be decorated with light emission by the back decorative substrate.

  The rear effect unit 3300 of this example is supported by a unit base 3301 and a unit base cover 3308 so that the slider can slide in the circumferential direction at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In this slider, the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially vertical in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (from the retracted position) when the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered on the left side when viewed from the front. Up to (appearance position state), it is possible to slide in the circumferential direction.

  In the normal state, the back effect unit 3300 is in a state in which the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered on the left side with respect to the horizontal. In this state, the back decorative body 3306 attached to the front side of the slider. However, it is in the state located in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in the normal state, the back decorative body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 is positioned above the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is in a state invisible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in a state (see FIG. 92).

  On the other hand, when the back drive unit 3300 is driven by the back drive motor 3302 to slide the slider in the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the front of the slider. The attached back upper decorative body 3306 is positioned below the front side of the unit base 3301 and the fist faces downward. In this state, the back decorative body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned at the approximate center of the window 2501. The state is visible from the side, that is, the appearance position (see FIG. 142).

[2-8. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. The back lower effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is disposed on the rear side of the back left guiding member 3070.

  The back lower direction production unit 3500 of this example is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric predetermined shape and is partially translucent, and is disposed on the rear side of the back lower decorative body 3501 and the rear lower decorative body 3501. A backside decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) disposed on the backside of the backside decorative board and attached to the backside decorative body 3501, and the back side of the slider A shallow box-shaped unit cover 3504 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is slid in the vertical direction and is open on the rear side, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit cover 3504 and mounted in the back box 3010 in the horizontal direction. A shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 whose front side is opened, and a lower back drive motor 3 which is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 and slides the slider up and down. It is provided with a 06, a.

  The lower back decorative body 3501 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape simulating a flame. Although not shown in the figure, the slider of the lower back direction production unit 3500 has a cylindrical support boss that is spaced apart in the vertical direction at both left and right positions and protrudes rearward, and a center in the left and right direction between the support bosses. And a pair of slits extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the back lower direction production unit 3500 has a pair of elevating guide grooves that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, penetrated in the front-rear direction, and extended in the up-down direction and into which the slider support boss is slidably inserted. And a through-hole portion that is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction between the pair of lift guide grooves and extends in an arc shape so as to bulge out the center in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 can support the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of elevating guide grooves.

  The unit base 3505 of the bottom effect unit 3500 has the same outer shape as that of the unit cover 3504, and a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction can be formed with the unit cover 3504. . The under back drive motor 3506 of the back under direction production unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and rotates while attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft extends through the unit base 3505 to the front side.

  Further, although not shown, the back lower direction production unit 3500 meshes with a drive gear and a spur gear-like drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lower drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear that is disposed on the right side of the drive gear and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and meshes with the first transmission gear and is disposed on the right side of the first transmission gear. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505, and meshed with the second transmission gear and disposed at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the second transmission gear when viewed from the front. A spur gear-shaped third transmission gear rotatably supported by a base 3505, and a unit that meshes with the drive gear and that is on the left side of the drive gear in front view. A fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the sleeve 3505, an extending piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and protruding forward from the tip of the extending piece on the left side of the unit cover 3504 when viewed from the front. A left link member having a transmission pin that is slidably inserted into the slit on the left side of the slider through the through-hole portion, and meshes with the third transmission gear, and is located on the right side of the third transmission gear when viewed from the front The fan-shaped gear portion that is rotatably supported by the unit base, the extended piece that extends radially outward from the gear portion, and the front of the unit cover 3504 that protrudes forward from the tip of the extended piece on the right side of the unit cover 3504 And a right link member having a transmission pin that is slidably inserted into the slit on the right side of the slider through the through-hole portion.

  Although not shown, the back bottom rendering unit 3500 has the left link member and the right link member arranged symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and the drive gear is driven to rotate by the back left drive motor 3506. The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears cause the left link member and the right link member to rotate in directions opposite to each other with the respective transmission pins at the same height. That is, when the left link member and the right link member are rotated, the height position of each transmission pin is changed, and the slider, that is, the lower back decorative body 3501 is slid up and down by the transmission pin. It can be moved up and down.

  Further, although not shown in the drawing, the lower back effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider inserted into the elevation guide groove in the unit cover 3504, and is arranged between the support boss and the elevation guide groove. A lifting bush, a transmission link inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pins of the left link member and the right link member inserted into the slit of the slider and disposed between the transmission pin and the slit, and an extension piece in the left link member An arcuate gear press disposed between the drive gear and attached to the unit base 3505, and an elevation position detection capable of detecting the slide position (elevation position) of the back decorative body 3501 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3505. Backside relay that relays the connection between the sensor and the backside decorative board and the second drive board 3027 attached to the front surface of the unit cover And it includes a plate, a.

  Although the illustration of the left link member of the lower back effect unit 3500 is omitted, the left link member includes a detection piece extending outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis. By detecting by the lift position detection sensor, the rotation position of the left link member can be detected, and thus the lift position of the back lower decorative body 3501 can be detected.

  In the back lower effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back lower decorative body 3501 is located below the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 in a state where the lower back decorative body 3501 is positioned at the lower end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction. It is located and is in a state that cannot be seen from the player side (a state of the retracted position) (see FIG. 92). On the other hand, in a state where the back lower decorative body 3501 is positioned at the upper end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction, the back lower decorative body 3501 is positioned in the upper window portion 2501 from the lower side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. Thus, it is in a state visible from the player side (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 142). As shown in FIG. 142, when the back upper decorative body 3306 of the back upper rendering unit 3300 and the back lower decorative body 3501 of the back lower rendering unit 3500 are in the appearance positions of each other, the lower end and the upper end of each of them. It approaches so as not to touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 5 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 96, FIG. 97, etc., this liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. It is like that.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and is projected from the left side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the right side of the back side of the back box 3010, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3040. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward and closing the insertion slot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 143), and the like, and a peripheral control board box 1910 on the rear side. , And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, each speaker 921 provided in the door frame 3 and


The volume output from the speaker 821 and the like provided in the main body frame 4 can be adjusted.

  Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 that houses an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight, on the left side of the peripheral control board box 1910 when viewed from the back.

[2-10. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle production unit of the center actor in the front unit, and FIG. 140 (a) is a state where the front right middle movable decorative body of the front right middle production unit is in the normal position. And (b) is a perspective view seen from the front and slightly above in the state where the front right middle movable decorative body is in the appearance position. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back upper effect unit and the back lower effect unit in the back unit. . In the game board 5 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 92 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side through the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It is like that.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 has a front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle production unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, as shown in FIG. The outer periphery of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is located at the right end of 2501 and is surrounded by the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be visually recognized from the player side, whereas the rotating decorative body 2630 is viewed from the player side except for a part on the left side when viewed from the front. It is not visible.

  Further, in a normal state, the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upper decoration body 3306 of the back effect unit 3300, and the back lower decoration of the back effect unit 3500. Each of the bodies 3501 is located outside the window portion 2501 in the front view center accessory 2500 so that it cannot be seen from the player side.

  The game board 5 according to the present embodiment has a front right middle production unit 2600 according to a special lottery result that is drawn when a game ball is received from the normal state to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The back side effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3300, and the back bottom effect unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front right middle production unit 2600, by rotating the front first drive motor 2651, the annular rotating decorative body 2630 in the front right middle decorative body 2610 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, the rotating decorative body 2630 is in a state where only a part of the left side when viewed from the front can be visually recognized from the player side. It is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward depending on the direction of rotation.

  In the front right middle production unit 2600, the base second member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is rotated around the front second middle drive motor 2671, with a bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof as the center. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be rotated and moved from the normal position located at the rightmost position in the front view in the normal state to the appearance position located at the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 139). ). In this appearance position state, as shown in FIG. 139, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the front right outer effect unit 2700 to the left in the front view, and only a part of the left side in the front view is from the player side. The rotation decoration body 2630 of the front right middle decorative element 2610 that could not be visually recognized is detached from the rear side of the front right middle outer periphery decoration member 2730 and almost all of the rotation decoration body 2630 is visible from the player side.

  By rotating the front right middle production unit 2600 to the appearance position, the front right middle decorative body 2610 moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the front middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the player side. Can stand out. With the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 moved to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be made more conspicuous by rotating the rotary decorative body 2630 by driving the front first drive motor 2651. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right.

  In the front right middle production unit 2600, in the state of the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front of the stage 2510, and the front right middle movable decorative body is shown from the stage 2510 side. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

  Note that the guide piece 2664 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 is positioned on an extension line on the right side of the first stage 2511 of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition wall member 2520. Since it is guided by an arc-shaped groove (space), a game ball that deviates from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) to the right is inside the groove (space) that guides the guide piece 2664. Even if it is stored and held (see FIG. 140 (a)), the front right middle effect unit 2600 (front right middle movable decorative body 2610) moves from the normal position to the appearance position to guide the stored and held game balls. The piece 2664 can be pushed leftward and returned to the stage 2510 side.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle production unit 2600 can fly the game ball accommodated and held on the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position. (See FIG. 140 (b)), so that the player can be shown a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center actor 2500, and the player can be shown the movement of the game medium. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  In the back side effect unit 3100 of the game board 5, the back side effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit are driven by driving the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back side slide unit 3150. 3100L can be moved from a position (retracted position) invisible from the player side to a position (appearance position) where it can be viewed from the player side by moving to the center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( (See FIG. 141). In the state where the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is moved in the horizontal direction by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. In addition to the state in which the width is narrowed vertically, the rotating decoration bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the vertical direction are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen visible from the player side. Can be strongly attracted to the back right effect unit 3100R, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this Yokoura production unit 3100, three rotating decorative bodies 3126 respectively supported by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are separately extended in the vertical direction by driving the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. It can be rotated around. When the rotating decoration bodies 3126 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are visible from the player side, they can be rotated by rotating them. A movable effect by rotation of the decorative body 3126 can also be enjoyed.

  Specifically, for example, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L of the back side effect unit 3100 is moved to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body is driven by the back side rotation drive motor 3123 in the retracted position. 3126 is rotated so that the surface on which the predetermined decoration is applied is stopped so as to face the player side, and then it is moved to the appearance position, and the rotation decoration body 3126 is rotated every time it is moved to the appearance position. The stop position can be made different. As a result, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 changes every time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearance of the decoration.

  Alternatively, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 is rotated to the appearance position by each of the back lateral rotation drive motors 3123. You can also. As a result, a plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3126 that roll like a roller appear on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player's interest is strongly expressed to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

  Furthermore, after the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved to the appearance position, the rotating decorative body 3126 may be rotated by the respective back lateral rotation drive motors 3123, thereby enabling the back right effect. After the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered with the unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L, the rotating decoration body 3126 supported by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is further rotated, thereby playing the game. The player can be surprised, and the player can be focused on the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like, and the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126 can be enjoyed.

  Also, in the back effect unit 3300 of the game board 5, the back drive motor 3302 is driven so that the back decoration 3306 slides downward in an arc from a retreat position that cannot be seen from the player side. It can move to the appearance position which becomes visible from a person side. In the state where the back decorative body 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 142, the approximate center of the fist in the back decorative body 3306 simulating a fist is emergency from the player side positioned at the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is in a conspicuous state and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Furthermore, in the back bottom production unit 3500 of the game board 5, by driving the back bottom drive motor 3506, the back bottom decoration body 3501 can be seen from the retreat position where it cannot be seen from the player side, and from the retreat position where the player side can see it. It can be moved to the appearance position. In the state where the back lower decorative body 3501 appears, as shown in FIG. 142, the liquid crystal display device 1900 extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 at approximately the center in the left-right direction. .

  When the game board 5 of this example is in a state in which the back top effect unit 3300 and the back bottom effect unit 3500 are both moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. The upper end of the body 3501 is in a state of being close to each other, and the back upper decoration body 3306 imitating a fist performs a movable effect as if hitting the back lower decoration body 3501 imitating a flame. Can be done.

  Although not shown, the game board 5 includes a movable effect by the front right middle effect unit 2600, a movable effect by the back side effect unit 3100, or a movable effect by the back upper effect unit 3300 and the back lower effect unit 3500. It is possible to perform a movable effect combining the above, and present the player with more diverse movable effects so that the player is less likely to get bored.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 143, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3081 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2125 and a general winning opening sensor 3082 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 2126, and a general winning opening, respectively. Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 5 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It has come to be.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2124 and the attacker via the panel relay board 3025 are output. A first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, and a first special signal are output to the solenoid 2113 via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3025, and the function display substrate 1191. A drive signal is output to the symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3082 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate 2105, so the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2114 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2114. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently are not frequently detected by the general winning opening sensor 3082. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 143, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, and the launch solenoid 682 for launch control, and the ball feed solenoid 551 for ball feed. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball A tank 802, a tank rail 803, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation are provided.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 143, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, It has. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball break detection sensor 827, detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A detection signal from a ball break detection sensor 827 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the passage of the payout device 830 and a count sensor 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the passage of the payout device 830 is given as an award of the payout device 830. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the ball relay board 754, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. A detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the payout device 830 is first input through the sensor board of the payout device 830 and the payout relay board 754. It is input to the circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 520 is filled with the game ball is filled with the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, the fact that there is no game ball in the passage formed in the base unit of the payout device 830 is notified, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball ball” (Specifically, at the entrance of the sorting space communicating with the passage formed in the base unit of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance. The payout rotating body rotates When the number “3” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751). If the number “5” is displayed, it is “retry error” (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value). When the number “6” is displayed, it is “full tank” (specifically, the storage space of the foul cover unit 520 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535). When the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (in either the range from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). To that effect).

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch are first sent to the CR unit via the frequency display board, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal 873. It is designed to be entered. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal 873 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O port 4111b. And input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator, CR unit connection terminal 873, It outputs to the main side relay terminal board 880 and a frequency display board, and this signal is input into a remaining frequency display.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 143, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a firing stop switch 518 (a stop button) that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will ) Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, and then input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal 873 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is first applied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. To the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d.

  Based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d generates a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the handle lever 504. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e triggers a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 201 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member is sent to the ball launching device 680 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 551 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 143, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 143, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3025, based on these various commands,
The game board side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, and gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs provided on the various decorative boards 2521 and 2522 on the gaming board side are used as serial I for lamp driving board. From the / O port via the drive board 3015,
-The game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors 3123, 3302, etc. for operating the various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive board 3015. Or send via
-Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3, and lighting on color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Door side light emission data for outputting a signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal, and door side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the drive board 3015, and the peripheral side relay terminal Via the plate 882 to the various decorative boards 280, 380 on the door frame side, dial drive motor 414, etc.
In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d A control signal (sound command) is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the drive board 3015 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. ing. The production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the operation of the upper plate production button 257 provided on the door frame 3 and the detection signal from the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 are the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a speaker provided on the door frame 3 via the drive board 3015 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 In addition, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 921 provided in the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter “peripheral control external” The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the drive board 3015 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 143, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 144 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment starts with various registers and main control as a process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. The data stored in the built-in RAM 4100e is initialized. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal. If it is determined that the data is stored, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game, and the special symbol variable display. Reach random numbers used for lottery processing of whether or not, the design random numbers (first design random number, the first design random number used to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number 2 random numbers), a random number counter for holding random numbers such as a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process for winning the winning of the movable piece 2106. To have.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is won for starting, the second starting port 2102 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 144 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various sensors such as the gate sensor 2126, the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning port sensor 3082, and the like are received. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to a win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2106 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2106 is increased when a specific condition (ON of the time reduction flag) is satisfied after the end of the big hit gaming state. A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is shortened, and the operating time when the movable piece 2106 is operated is set to a long time so that the normal state (non-shortening time) can be obtained. The time short state in which it is easier to accept the game ball into the second start port 2102 than in the state).

  Specifically, in the control of the short time state (referred to as short time control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to “255/255”, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is always “0.08 seconds”. The time that the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state (retracted state in which the game ball can be received in the second start port 2102) after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped is “5.5 seconds”. Yes. That is, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the normal hit must be won, and the passed game ball passes through the first passage 2122a (a guide route that can earn time due to the concave shape). By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in a time (0.08 seconds) shorter than the time until it reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2106, the game ball that has been a chance to win the normal hit is The second starting port 2102 can be accepted as it is. The movable piece 2106 is kept in the open state (retracted state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102) for “5.5 seconds”, and then closed (in the second starting port 2102). The game ball moves in a retreat state where it cannot be accepted.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-saving control, the second start is performed by setting the normal symbol winning probability to 0% and setting the time required for the normal symbol variation display control to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). The game ball cannot be received in the mouth 2102. In the non-short-time state, the normal symbol winning probability may be 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the short-time state (for example, 50%), and the normal symbol lottery result is a win. At this time, the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the time-short state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2102 and then moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball into the second start port 2102.

  In other words, in the non-time-short state, even if the player hits the right, the game ball cannot be won at the second start port 2102 or the prize is won with a very low probability. Therefore, in a non-time-saving state, the game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls win the first start port 2101 instead of the second start port 2102 (so-called “left” It is more advantageous for the player to consider the superiority or inferiority of the bonus when winning the big hit between the first start port 2101 side and the second start port 2102 side.

  On the other hand, in the short-time state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is moved backward for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). This makes it easy to win a game ball in the second start port 2102. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, the game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls win the second start port 2102 instead of the first start port 2101 (so-called “right” It is considered advantageous for the player to hit “

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the game state (time-short state) in which the so-called open extension function is activated is set to “255/255”. For example, it is not always necessary to set the normal win at 100%, such as setting the probability that the normal hit is easily obtained.

  Also, as the time-shortening control, the control for increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol as compared with the non-time-short state, the control for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol compared with the non-time-short state, the movable of the second start port 2102 Control for extending the period for retracting the piece 2106 from the non-time-short state, control for increasing the number of times the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is retracted from the non-time-short state, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second Any one or any of the controls for shortening the time required for the variable symbol display control of the special symbol indicator 1186 (the time required for the variable symbol display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900) from the non-short-time state. Combinations (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3081, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning port sensor 3082, etc., as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the first start port sensor 3081 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball wins the second start port 2102 and the second start. When the mouth sensor 2125 is turned on, “1 ball” is awarded, and when the count sensor 2114 is turned on when the game ball is won and the count sensor 2114 is turned on, the game ball is awarded at the general prize ports 2104 and 2201. When the general winning opening sensor 3082 is turned on, "10 balls" are paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of suspensions as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the main control. A first start port passage process such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2125 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting port passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-The result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "6R probability variation big hit A", "6R probability variation big hit B", or "6R normal big hit". When the count sensor 2114 detects that the prize winning opening 2103 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when nine game balls have been won in the prize winning opening 2103, the opening / closing pattern ( (Round game) is controlled 6R big hit game state to repeat 6 times,
When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either “16R probability variation big hit A” or “16R probability variation big hit B”, the big prize opening 2103 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that nine game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2103 is repeated 16 times. Control to 16R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "12R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 2114 when 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2103 is controlled to 12R big hit game state,
-When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 2114 after the game has been won or 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2103 is controlled to 8R big hit game state,
-When the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "4R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2103 or not is controlled to a 4R big hit game state,
-When the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests either "2R probability variable big hit" or "2R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2103 is shortened. An open / close pattern (round game) that is closed after opening for a time (for example, 0.6 seconds) is controlled to a 2R big hit game state that is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-shortening control is executed, the right-handed strike is more advantageous to the player than in the left-handed manner. As described above, the left hand is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101, a maximum of 6 rounds of long-open big hit game Only state (generally 750 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, when the big hit is won, the probability (allocation rate of the winning species) is approximately 50%. ) Is a 16-round long-open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), etc. Since the value increases, it is possible to wait for a larger amount of prize balls when the control is shifted to the right-handed state than when it is left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the big prize opening 2103, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the special control flag described later, Processing such as resetting is performed.

  Also, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the big prize opening 2103, as shown in FIG. 151, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Each set process of a flag, a time reduction flag, and a special control flag is executed.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later, and is a big hit (6R probability variable big hit A, 6R) for which the probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when the big hit gaming state based on the probable big hit B, the 16R probable big hit A, the 16R probable big hit B, the 12R probable big hit, the 8R probable big hit, the 4R probable big hit, the 2R probable big hit, or the next big hit Is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 155 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state). As shown in FIG. 151, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (6R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit), and next big hit Is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 155 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The special control flag is a flag indicating that special control described later is being executed. As shown in FIG. 151, a special type of big hit ( 16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit) are set when the big hit gaming state is terminated, and when the big hit gaming state is started in the set state, It is reset when the fluctuation counter is updated (counted up) to a predetermined number.

  The fluctuation counter is a counter indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the fluctuation counter is reset, and is used in a first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 153 described later. It is updated when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes (for example, counts up), and at least a specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, It is reset when a big hit gaming state based on 8R probability variable big hit) is started.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S35), whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set as the process of step S36. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S40b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S40b), unlike the big hit control process (step S40a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2103 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the special control flag and the fluctuation counter are small in the small hit control process (step S40b) as in the big hit control process (step S40a). It is reset (special control flag, variation counter) when the winning game state is started, and is set (special control flag) when the small hit gaming state ends.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S36), the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S38).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S37), the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of stop is executed (step S39). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second special random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can maintain the driving ball (right strike) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the short time state (high probability short time state). Only lottery for two special random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3081 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S42). If it is determined in step S42 that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol (lottery for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S43 to S44 are performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as the random number obtained in step S41. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S44, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2125 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the number of the second special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S53 to S54 are performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is used as the random number acquired in step S51. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command (first hold) that indicates the number of hold of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the number of hold of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2101 Number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Further, when the number of the second special symbol held changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2102, a command (first number) for instructing the number of second special symbol held in the storage process (step S 20). Two hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).

  5. The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 144).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 149, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e. Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and the first winning slot 2101 is used for the start winning prize. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2102. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 151 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and the gaming state is low for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) (low probability non-probability). Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of short-time state and low-probability short-time state, and jackpot at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short-time state, high probability short-time state) A determination table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 204 types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 types of first jackpot determination values. The first special random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the special random number is the loss (a jackpot probability at a low probability; approximately “1/321”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, 204 types of second special The random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, the 1020 types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value that indicates that the jackpot is won, and 641212 types of second special random numbers are The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the probability is a big hit probability at the time of a low probability (generally “1/321”).

  Further, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the 2040 types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value, and the 639696 types of first special random numbers are determined to be the loss determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (a jackpot probability at a high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, 2040 types of second special The random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, 1020 types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value that indicates that the jackpot is won, and 62476 types of second special random numbers are lost. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to be coincident with a loss judgment value indicating that (a probability of jackpot at high probability; approximately “1/32”). Note that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the first special random number and the jackpot determination table referred to compare with the second special random number (the number of jackpot determination values is the same number). The jackpot judgment value may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)) may be different. In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table may be made different (both may be made different).

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the jackpot is set (step S116), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S115 that the jackpot has been lost, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the read first special random number has won the jackpot based on the selected jackpot determination table. Is determined (step S117). However, as described above, in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, the first special random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; 0/65536). Therefore, in this step S117, It will be determined that the small win is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol normal process (not shown) in the second special symbol process (step S39), a second special random number that matches the small hit determination value can be read (small hit probability; “64 minutes 1)). As a result, when it is determined that it matches the small hit determination value, a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (corresponding to step S118 in the second special symbol process). Process), the jackpot determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S117 that it is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-time-short state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability time-short state. And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-short state state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reached. Are associated with the above reach random numbers. However, in the reach determination table for the high probability short-time state, in order to maximize the progress of the game in the short-time state, all of the 72 types of reach random numbers should match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  Further, the reach determination table in the low probability state has one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short time state reach. Then, the reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 kinds of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the high probability non-time-short state is the same as the low probability non-time-short state.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 152, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol is determined as a mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 151 (B), the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side includes symbol random numbers (here, a total of 200) with respect to the determination results (6R probability variation big hit A, 6R probability variation big hit B, 6R normal big hit). Number of first symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side includes the determination results (16R accuracy variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 2R. Symbol random numbers (in this case, a total of 200 second symbol random numbers) are stored in association with the probability variation big hit and 2R normal big hit, respectively.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the probable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the regular jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state are the same, but the first symbol random number The expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the jackpot.

The specific game / production contents for each type of jackpot will be described later, but can be summarized as follows.
1. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 6 is repeated 6 times to control the game ball to the 6R big hit gaming state that can enter the big prize opening 2103 (easy), and after this 6R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 6R big hit gaming state, a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins is performed. Is controlled to the effect mode indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 6 is repeated 6 times to control the game ball to the 6R big hit gaming state that can enter the big prize opening 2103 (easy), and after this 6R big hit gaming state Controls a high probability non-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and performs a battle production (battle defeat production) in which a specific character loses during the execution period of the 6R big hit gaming state. In the state, the 6R probability variation big hit B which is controlled to the effect mode indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be a relatively disadvantageous state

  3. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 6 is repeated 6 times to control the game ball to the 6R big hit gaming state that can enter the big prize opening 2103 (easy), and after this 6R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a low probability non-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 6R big hit gaming state, a battle production (battle defeat production) in which a specific character is defeated is performed. In the state, the liquid crystal display device 1900 indicates that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state as in the case of 6R probability variation big hit B (high probability non-short state). 6R usually big hit, which is controlled in the effect mode

  4). The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 16 are repeated 16 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) to the 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and a complete bonus production that completes the production of how many rounds are accumulated during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state, An effect mode in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows that it is a relatively advantageous state in the high-probability short-time state It is controlled 16R probability variation jackpot A

  5. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 16 are repeated 16 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) to the 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and how long it takes between the execution period of the 16R big-hit gaming state and the predetermined period after being controlled to the high-probability short-time state Performs an extra challenge effect that directs whether the number of rounds will be accumulated, and a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state And thereafter 16R probability variation big hit B to be a relatively favorable state is controlled to the effect mode shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900

  6). The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 12 are repeated 12 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 12R big hit gaming state, after this 12R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and how long it takes during the execution period of the 12R big-hit gaming state and until a predetermined period elapses after being controlled to the high-probability short-time state Performs an extra challenge effect that directs whether the number of rounds will be accumulated, and a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state 12R probability variation big hit or later it is relatively advantageous state is controlled to effect mode shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 has

  7). The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and how long between the execution period of the 8R big-hit gaming state and the predetermined period after being controlled to the high-probability short-time state After a certain period of time has elapsed since the control of the high probability time-short state has been performed. 8R probability variation big hit that it is a relatively favorable state is controlled to the effect mode shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900

  8). The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected at 4 are repeated four times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 4R big hit gaming state, after this 4R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state is generated, and how long is a predetermined period after the control period of the 4R big-hit gaming state and the high-probability time-short state has elapsed. After a certain period of time has elapsed since the control of the high probability time-short state has been performed. 4R probability variation big hit that it is a relatively favorable state is controlled to the effect mode shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900

  9. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or after the big winning opening 2103 is opened in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Until a big hit game state occurs, a high probability non-short-time state is controlled, and a bonus end effect is suggested to suggest that a relatively advantageous state will end during the execution period of the 2R big hit game state. In the short-time state, the 2R probability variation big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a relatively disadvantageous state.

  10. The count sensor 2114 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or after the big winning opening 2103 is opened in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Until a big hit gaming state occurs, a low probability non-time-short state is controlled, and a bonus end effect is suggested that suggests that a relatively advantageous state will end during the execution period of the 2R big hit gaming state. In the short-time state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled in the effect mode indicated in the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be a relatively disadvantageous state.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2301, and the movable piece 2106 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the first special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and the big hits (6R positive variation big hit A, 6R positive variable big hit B, 6R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. become. Similarly, in the right-handed state, a game ball is not won at the first start port 2101. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only fluctuation display is executed, and big hits related to the second special symbol (16R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) become.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 6 times, whereas only about 750 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 6R probability variation big hit A is determined, 6R probability variation big hit A symbol is decided as big hit symbol, and when 6R probability variation big hit B is decided, 6R probability variation big hit B is assumed as big hit symbol. If the symbol is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot, the 6R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. Although not shown in the figure, when the 16R probability variation big hit A is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol A is decided as the big hit symbol, and when 16R probability variation big hit B is decided, the big hit symbol is 16R. When the probability variation big hit symbol B is decided, when the 12R probability variation big hit is decided, the 12R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit is decided, the big hit symbol is decided as the 8R probability variable big hit symbol, and the 4R probability variation If the jackpot is determined, the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 2R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 2R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined, and the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. 2R Normal jackpot symbol is determined.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the processing of step S133. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S133 in the second special symbol process (step S39), the small special symbol ( After the specific symbol stop mode is determined (step S134), the process proceeds to step S137.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S133, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the special symbol will be lost when the special symbol is stopped (step S136), and then proceeds to step S137. To do.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the lottery result (big hit type, small hit, reach is off, or off) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a synchronized manner with the same symbol in a variable manner and may be stopped at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a mode (stop pattern) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped in a state where the time reduction function is not activated (the low probability non-time short state and the high accuracy non-time short state) If the 6R probability variation big hit A, 6R probability variation big hit B, or 6R normal big hit among the big hits is specified from the received determination result notification command, the combination of three left, middle and right decorative symbols is decided. To do. On the other hand, when the time-shortening function is operating (high-accuracy time-short state), out of the big hits, one of 16R accuracy variation big hit A, 16R accuracy variation big hit B, 12R accuracy variation big hit, 8R accuracy variation big hit, or 4R accuracy variation big hit is obtained. If any of the symbols from “0” to “9” is selected, a combination of three symbols is determined), and if either of the big hits, the 2R probability variation big hit symbol or the 2R normal big hit is obtained , When a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols) is specified, and a small hit is specified, a symbol that does not involve reach (left・ Determine the combination of at least the left and right decorative symbols among the middle and right decorative symbols (or a specific symbol combination similar to the case of 2R probability variable big hit symbol and 2R normal big hit, It may be a symbol combination of dedicated time Koatari such as scan eyes). Also, in any gaming state, if a reach loss is specified, it is a missed symbol with reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" If a combination of symbols with different symbols; reach-losing symbols) is determined and a detachment is specified, a detachable symbol without a reach (at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols will be different symbols) Determined to be a combination). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  In any case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays an effect image at the time of hitting before the big hit game is started when the win is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, and after the big hit game is started. An effect image during the big hit game is displayed.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the small hit flag Is set (step S143), a variation pattern table at the time of small hitting (not shown) is selected (step S144), and if a reach flag is set (step S145), a variation pattern table at reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S146), and the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are selected. If none of the grayed not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display 1185 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random numbers, second special random numbers) and design random numbers (first design random numbers, second design random numbers). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d.

  As will be described later, the variation pattern table at the time of a small hit in this example basically corresponds to step S144 in the second special symbol process (step S39) in the time-short state (high probability time-short state, etc.). Is selected by the processing to be performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the small hit gaming state corresponding to the small hit in the short time state starts, the variation counter is reset, and when the small hit gaming state ends. A special control flag is set. Along with this, a new round game (game block) is started after a predetermined time (a specific time width for convergence) after the small hit game state ends. An additional challenge directing to be described later is suddenly started. Therefore, as the variation time when the small hit is obtained, it is possible to set a time sufficient to perform an effect suggesting that an additional challenge effect (rounded-up effect) described later is started. desirable. For example, an effect pattern that appears when a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit is obtained in a time-short state (such as a high-probability time-short state). ) Paired effect patterns (the effect of whether or not the time saving state is ended does not end the time saving state, and a new round game (game block) is started after a predetermined time (a specific time width for convergence). It is also possible to set a fluctuating time that is prepared as an effect that indicates that an additional challenge effect, which will be described later, is newly started.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, in the non-time-short state, 164 types of random numbers among 241 types of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of random numbers are big hits. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the super-reaching effects with low expectation is executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers indicate that any one of the super-reaching effects with high expectation degree is executed. It is set as a judgment value (223-240).

  Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and when a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state has a player's expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. It is getting higher. In other words, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is eventually displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-short-time state and the short-time state. 12 seconds variation time is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 to 12 seconds as the short time state The variable time can be set, and the variable time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, and in the short-time state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is made during the variation of the first special symbol. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball to the second start port 2102 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It is possible to suppress the discharge without being subjected to the lottery process.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 141, a right-handed game ball passes through a route (such as a guide passage member 2142) that is spaced by one game ball, and first, the gate portion 2105 (first step). Is supplied to the region X immediately above the second unit 2120). As described above, when the game ball is received from the region X to the gate unit 2105 (second unit 2120) when in the short-time state (high probability short-time state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained. (The winning probability is 100%), and the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is maintained in a state of being retreated for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where it can be successively received one after another at the second starting port 2102 (a short time state in which almost all of the game balls thrown into the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2102). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. Become possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) Game balls are often received at the two start ports 2102 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is extremely as the variation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls that are launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2102, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, an obstacle nail (not shown) as an adjustment member formed so as to contribute to the probability of accepting a game ball to the gate portion 2105 in the region X is provided. In this way, the probability of accepting the right-handed game ball to the gate unit 2105 (second unit 2120) can be easily adjusted in a wide range including a value close to “100%”. Yes.

  In addition, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit (16R positive variation big hit B, 12R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit, 4R positive variable big hit) is terminated in this embodiment. In the period from when the special control flag is set to the time when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is exhausted to the predetermined number (the period until the fluctuation number counter is updated to the predetermined number and the special control flag is reset), As the big hit is obtained with a small number of fluctuations, the fluctuation time at the big hit selected becomes longer (the fluctuation time at the big hit selected becomes shorter as the big hit is obtained with a larger number of fluctuations). Special control for changing the variation pattern table referred to in the second variation pattern setting process is performed. In other words, in this case, the time required for multiple (predetermined) number of symbol variations will converge within a specific time width regardless of which symbol variation is hit. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations after a small hit gaming state based on the small hit on the second start port 2102 side is set (special control flag is set) is a predetermined number. Even during the period until digestion (period until the fluctuation counter is updated to a predetermined number and the special control flag is reset), the fluctuation time at the big hit is selected so that the big hit can be obtained with a small number of fluctuations. The variation pattern table referred to in the second variation pattern setting process is changed so as to have a tendency to become longer (the variation time at the time of the big hit becomes shorter as the big hit is obtained with a larger number of variations). Special control is to be performed. That is, in this case, the special control is used even in a period after the predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol is exhausted after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit of the specific type on the second start port 2102 side is finished. It becomes possible to execute the below-described effects at any time.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. As a result, if it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, that the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  When the variation timer is not 0 even though 1 is subtracted from the variation timer (step S171), until the variation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol is to be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are performed.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the processing, display control for causing the first special symbol display 1185 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187), The waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying to the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, The time reduction flag is reset (step S189). If the special control flag is set, the special control flag is reset, the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is set to the initial value. When the process is updated so that the process shifts to one special symbol normal process (step S194), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S35, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S40a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, the type of big hit (6R accuracy variation big hit A, 6R accuracy variation big hit B, 6R normal variation big hit, 16R accuracy variation big hit A, 16R accuracy variation big hit B, 12R accuracy variation big hit B, 8R accuracy variation big hit, 4R accuracy variation big hit, 2R accuracy variation big hit, 2R normal variation hit Jackpot start command according to jackpot (6R probability variation big hit A command, 6R probability variation big hit B command, 6R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation big hit A command, 16R probability variation big hit B command, 12R probability variation big hit command, 8R probability variation big hit command, 4R probability variation big hit command Jackpot command, 2R probability variable jackpot command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit designated by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S186 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S186), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S190). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S190), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S191), and the small hit game is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S193), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S194), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the process of step S36, and in the above-described small hit control process (step S40b). The small hit gaming state is executed. Incidentally, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when the small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (NO in step S190), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing relating to the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is not set (steps S35 and S36), and a new game is executed according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S37 to S39).

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a lottery process is performed for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1189. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the game (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol becomes a mode suggesting “per normal map”, the movable piece 2106 moves backward to accept the game ball to the second start port 2102. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process to be controlled (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 144).

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal storage counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S826) ( Step S826) If the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high-probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a and is used when the game state is short time (high probability short time state). And a non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the 255 common common random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment values indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the usual deviation determination value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2105, the winning piece is always won by the normal time, and the movable piece 2106 is moved backward to accept the game ball to the second start port 2102. It is possible to control.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, even when the game ball passes to the gate portion 2105 at the non-time saving time, the movable piece 2106 is retracted and moved to the second starting port 2102 because it is not won per hit. It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game balls. However, as described above, the normal symbol hit may be obtained even in the non-short-time state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery result is the win. When the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the time-short state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2102, the movable piece 2106 is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball in the starting port 2102.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol is per unit (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

[5. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 159, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the liquid crystal is based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Control processing related to the display device 1900 is executed.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3041 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 mS has elapsed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process ends, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

  Hereinafter, the technically characteristic games and effects in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as one of its purposes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement entertainment when the maintenance of an advantageous state is guaranteed over a long period of time (until the winning is achieved). There is. That is, in such a state (here, a high probability short-time state), there is a case where a game with no sense of tension (advantageous game) is played endlessly for the player, and the mood is relaxed, so There was a concern about the decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first of all, a specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit) in the short time state (high probability short time state). When obtained, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed by dividing it into a plurality (more precisely, 1 to 4) of game blocks. Then, a new round game is further executed after a predetermined time in both the inter-block interval period existing between those game blocks and the short time state (high probability short time state) that occurs after the big hit game is finished. By creating an extra challenge that suggests the possibility of a long-running time (high-probability short-lived state), it is possible to create an effect that makes it seem as if the big hit game is still running. .

  FIG. 161 shows a game or production progress when a specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, or 4R probability variation big hit is obtained) and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit is executed. It is a time chart explaining the example about the content concerning.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a 16R probability variation big hit B (one of the big hits of a specific type) is obtained in the short time state (high probability short time state), and at the timing t1, the 16R probability variation big change is obtained. If the big hit game corresponding to the big hit B is started, the main control MPU 4100a first performs control so that round games for 16 rounds are sequentially executed. However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when a big hit game corresponding to a specific type of big hit is performed, "round game for four rounds" is positioned as one unit of the above game block. By performing control that makes it appear as if it has been executed four times, a big hit game (here, round games for 16 rounds) corresponding to a specific type of big hit is digested. In the jackpot game according to this embodiment, approximately 500 prize balls can be obtained each time the game block (round game for 4 rounds) is consumed once.

  More specifically, in the jackpot game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the “round game for four rounds” positioned as the above game block is a round game of 1 to 4 rounds, It corresponds to a round game of 5-8 rounds, a round game of 9-12 rounds, and a round game of 13-16 rounds, respectively.

  Here, in each of these game blocks, there are three intra-block interval periods (for example, in the case of round games of 1 to 4 rounds, between the round game of the first round and the round game of the second round). Interval period, interval period between the second round game and the third round game, and interval period between the third round game and the fourth round game (all not shown) ) Is included, but the intra-block interval period is immediately digested in a relatively short time (eg, 1 second), thereby recognizing that an interval period has occurred. The impression that round games (round games for 4 rounds) within each game block are executed together as a whole (game block) Middle jackpot gaming in click is have its impression) that will not be terminated.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is in the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit B as shown in FIG. Within each period in which the positioned “round game for four rounds” is performed, control is performed so that a bonus effect that suggests that the player is in a state where a prize can be obtained appears.

  For example, each time a new game block is started, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a specific image (for example, four white frame images) indicating that the game is in a state where four rounds of game can be digested. . Then, each time a round game is digested, the specific image is updated so as to suggest the number of round games that have not been digested in the new game block (for example, each time a round game is digested) By performing display control that fills one of the four outline frame images), the impression that a round game (round game for four rounds) within each game block is executed together (game) The impression that the big hit game is not ended in the middle of the block is suitably given.

  However, the specific image does not necessarily have to be conscious of “round games for four rounds”, and indicates that a predetermined number of prizes (approximately 500 prize balls) can be obtained. It may be. For example, when a new game block is started, one blank frame image is displayed, and the round frame image is gradually filled as the round game is digested in the new game block. Even in the case of adopting the display mode, it is possible to imagine the quantity of prizes remaining in an unacquired state in each game block from the proportion of the area that is not yet filled, etc. It is possible to give an impression that round games in a block (round games for four rounds) are executed as a group.

  In addition, the specific image is continuously displayed (history display) after the round game in the game block (round game for four rounds) has been digested (for example, after being filled). Is desirable. That is, in this case, when a new game block is started, a new specific image (for example, an unfilled white frame image) is added and displayed. Depending on the number of such specific images displayed, this is displayed. You will be able to recognize the number of prizes you have won. In addition, such a specific image will be erase | eliminated when the below-mentioned round accumulation effect is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B, there is an inter-block interval period (a round game in the fourth round and a round game in the fifth round) between each game block. Interval period between the 8th round game and the 9th round game, and the interval period between the 12th round game and the 13th round game) However, the interval period between the blocks is digested in a relatively long time (for example, 18 seconds), so that a new round game (new game block) is further executed. The time sufficient to perform the later-described production (addition challenge production) is secured. Furthermore, as will be described later, by securing such a time (for example, 18 seconds) as an inter-block interval period, the big hit game still continues after the short-time state (high probability short-time state) occurs. It is possible to create a production situation as if it were being executed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific type of jackpot is an integer (4 times here) with respect to the number of round games included in the game block as a unit (here, 4 times). Here, the number of round games (4, 8, 12, 16) multiplied by 1 to 4) is determined to be executed as a big hit game. According to such a configuration, when any one of the specific types of big hits is obtained, the big hit game is terminated in the middle of each game block without digesting the round games for four rounds. When the game block ends (when a total of 4, 8, and 12 round games have ended), it is possible to provide a game such as “whether a new game block is started”.

  As a result of executing the above game block four times, if the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B is ended at the timing t2, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the big hit game end interval (here, extremely short A high probability time-short state is generated after a period of time is desirable (see FIG. 151 (c)).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all of the specific types of big hits are set such that a short time state (high probability short time state) occurs over a long period of time after the big hit game ends. Then, the big hit gaming state based on the specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit) is ended (special control flag is set). From the period until the special symbol variation is exhausted to a predetermined number (30 times in this case) (the period until the special control flag is reset in the short time state), it is selected so that the big hit is obtained with a small number of variations. This is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process so that there is a tendency that the fluctuation time at the big hit becomes longer (the fluctuation time at the big hit selected becomes shorter as the big hit is obtained with a larger number of fluctuations). Special control is performed to change the fluctuation pattern table.

  Here, although the principle for realizing such special control will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, a predetermined number (without change of the second special symbol) is interrupted through the special control. In this case, when at least a specific type of big hit is obtained before being digested, even if the big win is obtained by any symbol fluctuation, the previous big hit game (here, 16R probability variable big hit B) The time (timing t2 to t3) required from the end of the corresponding jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game is within a specific time width close to the inter-block interval period (for example, 18 seconds) ( Here, the convergence is made between 18 seconds and 20.4 seconds.

  That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the timing at which the first symbol variation is started in the period in which the special control is performed, and the 30th symbol variation after the loss variation is performed 29 times. There is a time difference of at least 17.4 seconds (total of 29 fluctuations and 29 symbol stops) between the start timing and the previous jackpot game (in this case, 16R probable big hit B The time (timing t2 to t3) required until the next big hit game is started after the end of the big hit game according to the time is set as a time value (for example, 18 seconds) as the inter-block interval period. It has become possible to converge this to a slight time difference of 2.4 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a big hit of a specific type in any symbol variation within the period of timing t2 to t3 (a period up to 30 symbol variations at most). (Here, 4R probability variable big hit) is obtained, the next game block is executed after the specific game block is digested in the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B. After the end of the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the behavior of the big winning opening 2103 and the 16R probability variable big hit B within the period until the end, a new big hit game (here, 4R probability variable big hit) is executed. It becomes difficult to distinguish the behavior of the special winning opening 2103 within the period until (timing t2 to t3).

  Such special control is executed in a short time state (high probability short time state) based on the end of the big hit game corresponding to at least a specific type of big hit (the special control flag is set). is there. Therefore, even if the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of the specific type is finished, as long as the big hit of the specific type continues to be obtained before the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested, the short-time state (high probability (Short time state) can be shown as if it is an inter-block interval period, and it is also possible to make it appear as if the big hit game started at the timing t1 continues without ending. It becomes like this. However, in this case, it is important to execute a common (effect) for urging the player to maintain the right handing in both the period during which the special control is performed and the inter-block interval period.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), it is specified after the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B is finished until the predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol is consumed. When a big hit of a type (here, 4R probability variable big hit) is obtained, regardless of the number of times the specific type of big hit is obtained, the previous big hit game (inside game block) When the time approximated to the inter-block interval period elapses after the end of the time (timing t3), the big hit game (inside game block) corresponding to the 4R probability variation big hit is started.

  Here, the big hit game (timing t3 to t4) corresponding to the 4R probability variable big hit is terminated when four round games (one game block) are consumed without passing through the inter-block interval period. After a big hit game end interval (again, an extremely short time is desirable), a high probability short-time state is generated. However, also in this case, the main control MPU 4100a performs the above-described special control based on the end of the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit (the special control flag is set). Therefore, it is possible to make the jackpot game (timing t3 to t4) corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot appear as if it is one of the game blocks included in the jackpot game started at the timing t1. Even after the big hit game (timing t3 to t4) is finished, it is possible to make it appear as if the big hit game started at the timing t1 has not been finished yet.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), digests a specific game block in a jackpot game (for example, timings t1 to t2) corresponding to a specific type of jackpot. Specific period before the next game block is executed (inter-block interval period) and after a big hit game according to the big hit of a specific type is completed After a predetermined time (a specific time width to be converged) in both the period (here, timings t2 to t3) until the jackpot is again obtained and a new jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed. An extra challenge suggesting the possibility of further execution of a round game (game block) is performed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), if the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B is started at the timing t1, the first game block (1 to 4 rounds) During the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first keeps the total amount of prizes (approximately 2000) that can be obtained in the jackpot game hidden, and a predetermined number of prizes (one game) The liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a specific image (for example, four white frame images) indicating that it is in a state where it can be acquired. Each time a round game in the first game block (1st to 4th rounds) is digested, the award amount remaining in an unacquired state in the game block is calculated based on an area ratio that is not yet filled. Control is performed to change the display mode of the specific image so that it can be imaged.

  On the other hand, when the first game block (1 to 4 rounds) ends and the first inter-block interval period (18 seconds) appears, the peripheral control MPU 4140a allows the game block to be continuously repeated. While keeping the execution secret, an additional challenge effect appears on whether a new game block (round game) is further executed. However, since the next game block is always executed after the end of the inter-block interval period (18 seconds), the success effect must always appear in the extra challenge effect in the inter-block interval period. Become.

In addition, as such an extra challenge production, for example,
In the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect such as whether or not a predetermined effect image (success effect) appears, and when a predetermined effect image (success effect) appears as a result of the effect, a new round game (new (Game block) is shown to be executed further,
-When an effect (successful effect) such as whether or not a specific action appears in a predetermined movable accessory, and when a specific action (successful effect) appears in the predetermined movable accessory as a result of the effect, It can be realized as an effect such as one showing that a round game (new game block) is further executed.

  Then, in the jackpot game corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the second to fourth game blocks are kept secret while keeping the total amount of prizes (approximately 2000) that can be won in the jackpot game secret. A specific image (for example, four white frame images) indicating that a predetermined number of prizes (a prize that can be obtained by one game block) can be obtained each time the is executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device In 1900, additional display is performed.

  For example, in the second game block, apart from the specific image displayed in the first game block (four filled frame images), new specific images (for example, four unfilled images). Are displayed (indicating that the game is a fifth to eighth round game), and in the third game block, a specific image (filled) is displayed in the first and second game blocks. In addition to the eight white frame images), a new specific image (for example, four unfilled white frame images) is additionally displayed (indicating that it is the ninth to twelfth round game) In the fourth game block, a new specific image (e.g., 12 filled outline images) displayed in the first to third game blocks is displayed. If, so that additionally displays a white frame image) the four that have not been filled (display that it is a round game of the 13 to 16 th).

  Also, in the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B, every time the second and third game blocks are finished and the inter-block interval period appears, it is kept secret how many times the game blocks are executed continuously. As it is, an additional challenge effect will appear as to whether or not a new game block (round game) will be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, even though the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit B is being performed, “a game block (round game for four rounds) can be executed as a unit and how many times it can be executed. It is possible to achieve a round-up production effect (in the figure, the part surrounded by a thick frame), such as “How many times can a round game be executed?” It becomes possible to plan.

  Then, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment digests a predetermined number of symbol variations after the big hit game (fourth game block) corresponding to the specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit B) is completed. The main control MPU 4100a also performs a period (timing t2 to t3) until a specific type of big hit (4R probability variation big hit) is obtained again before a new big hit game corresponding to the big hit is executed. While the above-described special control is being performed, the above-described extra challenge effect that appears in the inter-block interval period is performed. However, as will be described later, in such a short time state (high probability short time state), in the challenge challenge effect, it is undecided whether or not a successful effect will appear at the time the effect is started. Perform control to make a successful production appear on the condition that a specific type of big hit (4R-probable big hit) is obtained before a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested after (high probability short-time state) occurs It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, in combination with the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a, the short-time state (high-probability short-time state) after the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is completed is the big hit started at the timing t1. The game has not yet ended, and it can be shown as if it is an inter-block interval period (fourth inter-block interval period counted from timing t1) in the jackpot game.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on the fact that a specific type of big hit (4R probability change big hit) has been obtained before a predetermined number of symbol variations have been digested after the occurrence of a short time state (high probability short time state). When a successful production is caused to appear, the game block in the jackpot game (4R probability variation big hit) newly started at timing t3 is the game block in the jackpot game (16R probability variation big hit B) started at timing t1. Production control is performed as if it were shown. Thus, after the jackpot game (16R probability variable jackpot B) started at the timing t1 is completed, “how many times can this be executed with a game block (round game for four rounds) as one unit?” It is possible to continue the round roll-up effect (the part surrounded by a thick frame in the figure), and usually set as a specific type of big hit through such round-up round-up effects that span multiple jackpot games. This makes it possible to make the player feel as if a big hit of a type that is very advantageous to the player (probability big hit that can execute more than 16 rounds) is included.

  For example, in FIG. 161 (a), at timing t3, 4R probability change occurs before a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested after the big hit game (16R probability variation big hit B) corresponding to the specific type of big hit is completed. Although an example in which a big hit (a specific type of big hit) is obtained is shown, during the period in which the big hit game corresponding to the 4R probability variable big hit is performed (timing t3 to t4), the big hit game (4R) started at the timing t3 is shown. It does not indicate that the 1st to 4th round games are being executed in the probability variation jackpot), but the 17th to 20th round games (the 5th game) in the jackpot game (16R probability variation jackpot B) started at the timing t1. An effect indicating that (block) is executed is performed.

  As a result, it is possible to create a situation as if a big hit of a type that is extremely advantageous to the player (a probability big hit of at least 20 rounds) was obtained at timing t1, which cannot normally be set as a big hit of a specific type. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, it becomes difficult to grasp that the winning type (4R probability variation big hit) with the smallest number of prizes that can be obtained among the big hits of a specific type can be made difficult. It will also be expected to maintain the game entertainment at the time of winning the big hit.

  In addition, about the production | presentation which shows that the 17-20th round game (5th game block) is performed, it displayed in the 1st-16th round game (1st-4th game block), for example. A new specific image (for example, four unfilled white frame images) is additionally displayed separately from the specific image (16 filled white frame images), and each time the round game is digested The specific image is updated so as to suggest the number of round games that have not been digested in the new game block (timing t3 to t4) (for example, each time a round game is digested, This can be realized by performing display control for filling one of the outline frame images.

  According to the control by the peripheral control MPU 4140a while the above-described special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a, the big hit game is started at timings t2, 4 and the like after the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is started. Even if the control is repeated several times in the short-time state (high-accuracy short-time state) after completion, a predetermined number (30 times in this case) of symbol fluctuations after the short-time state (high-precision short-time state) is controlled As long as a specific type of jackpot is continuously obtained before the game is digested, the jackpot game generated at the timing t1 can be made to appear to be continued without being ended. That is, in this case, “in a single winning ball winning game (which actually includes a short-time state) generated at timing t 1, a game block (round game for 4 rounds) is executed as a unit and how many times it is executed. The round roll-up effect (in the figure, the part surrounded by a thick frame) will continue to be executed endlessly, and as a result, it is expected to suppress the decline in the game entertainment interest in the short-time state. Become so.

However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment performs control to end the progress of the round-up effect (the portion surrounded by a thick frame in the drawing) when any of the following conditions is satisfied. I am going to do that.
a. A big hit that is not a specific type is obtained before a predetermined number (30 times in this case) of symbol variation is digested after being controlled to the time-short state (high-precision time-short state) b. A predetermined number (30 in this case) of design fluctuations is digested without winning big hits after being controlled to the time-short state (high-precision time-short state).

  For example, it is assumed that at the timing t4 when the short-time state (high probability short-time state) occurs, it is determined that whether or not to make a successful effect appear, and the challenge effect is started.

  In this regard, in FIG. 161 (a), a 16R probability variable big hit A is obtained as a big hit that is not a specific type before a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested from timing t4, and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit is given at timing t5. In the case where the 16R probability variation jackpot A is obtained, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs control to cause a successful production to appear based on the fact that the 16R probability variation jackpot A is obtained. .

  In addition, during the period (timing t5 to t6) in which the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit A is performed, as in the case of the big hit game (4R positive variable big hit) started at the timing t3, the big hit game (16R positive variable big hit A ), The first to sixteenth round games are not executed, but the 21st to 36th round games in the big hit game (16R probability variable big hit B) started at the timing t1 are executed. Control is performed so that the effects shown are performed.

  However, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment executes the jackpot game corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot A by dividing it into a plurality of (more precisely, 1 to 4) game blocks. In other words, control is performed to sequentially digest 16 round games with only a relatively short interval. Note that the interval period here is set to be longer than the time value set for the intra-block interval period and shorter than the time value set for the inter-block interval period. Is desirable.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 151, among the big hit types obtained by the big hit determination on the second special symbol side, a large amount of balls can be obtained without an inter-block interval period having a relatively long time. There is only a type “16R probability variation big hit A”. Therefore, when a big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit A is performed, it is possible to recognize that the winning quantity expectation value is the largest hit only by confirming the behavior of the big winning opening 2103. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, by setting the time longer than the time set for the intra-block interval period, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by digesting each round game in the big hit game one by one You will be able to have a real feeling and will be expected to improve your game entertainment.

  Therefore, during the period in which the big hit game corresponding to the 16R probability variable big hit A is performed, an extra challenge effect regarding whether a new game block (or round game) is executed will not appear.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment performs the round game for 16 times in the big hit game (16R probability variable big hit A), the 21st to 36th times in the big hit game (16R probability variable big hit B) started at the timing t1. In addition to indicating that the game is executed as a round game, the bonus game started at the timing t1 is completed when the 36th round game is completed (the round roll-up effect ends). I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, the big hit game according to the big hit of the type (36R probability variation big hit) that is extremely advantageous to the player, which cannot be normally set as the big hit of the specific type, is made during the period of timing t1 to t6. It will be possible to create a situation that seems to have been executed, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, after a specific type of jackpot game is started, the above-described round accumulation effect (until the advantageous state (a state in which a loop is possible between the jackpot game and the short-time state) is not ended) In the drawing, the portion surrounded by a thick frame is not continued endlessly, but the end timing is controlled in an advantageous state. For example, at the timing t6, even if the above round roll-up effect is ended by the complete bonus effect, as in the case where the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is ended, the advantageous state (the big hit game and the short-time state) It is possible to expect that the big hit game is started relatively early while being controlled to the short-time state (high probability short-time state).

  Then, if the big hit game started in this way corresponds to the big hit of a specific type, the game and production progress that has occurred from the timing t1 ("game block (round game for four rounds) is used as a unit. “How many times can be executed (or how many times the round game can be executed)” is started from the beginning again.

  In other words, in this case, unless the advantageous state (a state in which a loop is possible between the big hit game and the short time state) is terminated, until the complete bonus effect appears as it was executed in the period of timing t1 to t6. A single winning ball winning game (in practice, a plurality of big hit games and a plurality of short-time states are included) and a short-time state (high-precision short-time state) controlled at timing t6 may alternately appear. Therefore, a big hit of a type (probable big hit that can execute more than 16 rounds) that is extremely advantageous to the player, which cannot normally be set as a big hit of a specific type, is actually the winning type. It becomes possible to raise awareness of the possibility of being included, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), in the big special determination on the second special symbol side, a specific type of big hit (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variable big hits and 4R probability variable big hits) all have an allocation probability of "19/200", whereas the allocation probability of 16R probability variable big hit A that causes the complete bonus effect to appear is higher than this "80/200" It is said that. In particular, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side is set as a higher allocation probability than any winning type. In this way, by adopting the probability setting as if the above-mentioned round roll-up effect is prevented from being endlessly continued, the above-mentioned round roll-up effect is difficult to think practically. Continuing over a period of time, it is now possible to run big hits (more than 16 rounds) of a type that is extremely advantageous to the player, which cannot usually be set as a big hit of a specific type It is possible to make the player more aware of the possibility of being included as a winning category, and to improve the gaming interest.

  In the short time state (high probability short time state) that occurs when the complete bonus effect (big hit game according to 16R probability variable big hit A) ends, the special control flag is set as shown in FIG. 151 (c). Not in the state Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state), the above-described special control is not performed by the main control MPU 4100a. As is well known, the big hit (step S142) and the small hit (step S142) are performed based on the result of the big hit determination. S144), the reach (step S146), and non-reach (step S147), each of a plurality of variation time is determined by lottery, the determined variation time (from the case where the above-described special control is performed) In general, symbol variation with a long variation time (especially in the case of loss variation) is performed (advantageous state effect).

  Such an advantageous state effect started at the timing t6 is basically continued until the big hit is obtained in the short time state (high probability short time state). And as mentioned above, when a big hit of a specific type is obtained, a game or production progress (such as “game block (round game for 4 rounds) that occurs from timing t1) is executed as a unit. (Or how many times the round game can be executed) "is started from the beginning as a redo.

  On the other hand, when the 16R probability variation big hit A is obtained, the game and the effect progress (complete bonus effect) as occurred from the timing t5 are started. However, here, since the above round accumulation effect (the portion surrounded by a thick frame in the figure) is not performed, the 16 round games are the 1st to 16th round games. The jackpot game is executed as a complete bonus effect indicating that the game is to be ended when the 16th round game is exhausted.

  On the other hand, when 2R probability variable big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained, 2R big hit game that repeats an opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed after at least opening the big prize opening 2103 (for example, 0.6 seconds) for a short time During the period in which the state is performed, a bonus end effect indicating that such an advantageous state (a state in which a loop is possible between the big hit game and the short-time state) is ended is performed. In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, it is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state, and in the case of 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability non-time-short state. By causing (specific production) to appear, the possibility of making a big hit determination with a high probability is made aware.

  On the other hand, even in the short-time state (high probability short-time state) that occurs at timing t6, if the hold state of the big special determination on the second special symbol side may not be maintained, the big win on the first special symbol side in the hold state It is possible that the judgment is digested, and as a result, a jackpot on the first special symbol side is obtained.

  In this regard, when the 6R probability variation big hit A is obtained as a big hit on the first special symbol side in the time-short state (high probability time-short state), the 6R probability variation in the low-probability non-time-short state or high-probability non-time-short state. As in the case where the jackpot A is obtained, a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins is performed during the execution period of the 6R jackpot game state. Since the special control flag is not set after the 6R big hit gaming state is finished, the above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a is not performed (the same as the time-short state occurring at the timing t6). ) Is controlled. This battle production (battle victory production) is a battle production (battle defeat production) in which a specific character is defeated until reaching a branch point where the specific character wins or loses after the production starts. The same contents of production appear, and the progress of production in which the specific character wins appears at the branch point where the specific character wins or loses.

  On the other hand, when 6R probability variation big hit B or 6R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit on the first special symbol side in the short time state (high probability short time state), the low probability non-time short state or the high probability non-time short state In the same way as when 6R probability variation big hit A is obtained at this time, during the execution period of the 6R big hit game state, a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character loses is performed. After the 6R big hit gaming state is finished, the 6R probability variable big hit B is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state, and the 6R normal big hit is controlled to the low probability non-time-short state. Even in such a case, by causing a common effect (specific effect) to appear, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the jackpot determination is performed with a high probability. In addition, this battle production (battle defeat production) is a battle production (battle victory production) in which a specific character wins from the start of the production until reaching a branch point where a specific character wins or loses. The same content of production appears, and the progress of production in which the specific character loses appears at the branch point where the specific character wins or loses.

  Incidentally, when the big win on the first special symbol side is obtained, the above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a is not performed after the big hit game is finished, regardless of which big hit is obtained. Therefore, for example, if the big bonus on the first special symbol side is obtained while the above round roll-up effect is being performed (for example, within the period of timing t2 to t3), before reaching the complete bonus effect In addition to showing that the round roll-up effect is ended, the battle effect is performed as an effect that makes it possible to recognize the possibility that even an advantageous state (a state in which a short time state and a big hit game can be looped) will be further ended. It is desirable to do so.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows the same game and effect progress as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (a) at timings t1 to t4, but is specified before a predetermined number of symbol variations are digested from timing t4. An example is shown in which a 2R probability variable big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit that is not a type, and a big hit game corresponding to the big hit is executed.

  That is, as will be described later, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is not subject to the above-mentioned special control when the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit that is not a specific type, and the previous big hit game ends. The time it takes for the next big hit game to start is converged within a specific time range (here, 18 seconds to 20.4 seconds) approaching the interval period between blocks (for example, 18 seconds). I don't want to let you.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when a 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit that is not a specific type before a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested from timing t4, Advantage that suggests the possibility that an advantageous state (a state in which a short-time state and a big hit game can be looped) is terminated by adding an extra challenge about whether or not a round game (game block) is further executed The end effect is to be performed. This advantageous end effect is a period in which symbol variation is performed in accordance with the 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit being obtained, and a period in which the big hit game is performed in accordance with the 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit being obtained. And done over. However, although this will also be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment has a possibility that the add-on challenge effect is resumed even when the advantageous end effect appears.

  After the big hit game is performed in this way, the 2R probability variable big hit is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state, and the 2R normal big hit is controlled to a low probability non-time-short state. Even in such a case, by causing a common effect (specific effect) to appear, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the jackpot determination is performed with a high probability.

  In addition, about the control aspect concerning such a symbol fluctuation | variation and effect when 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is not only the period when the above-mentioned special control is performed, but the time-saving state after the period ends. The same may be done in the (high probability short-time state).

  In FIG. 161 (c), the same game and production progress as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (a) appear at the timings t1 to t4, but the big hit before the predetermined number of symbol variations are digested from the timing t4. An example that could not be obtained is shown.

  In other words, as will be described later, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is able to perform the process even when the losing is obtained in all of the predetermined number of symbol variations after the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is completed. The time required for all of the predetermined number (here, 30 times) of symbol fluctuations to be digested is within a specific time width (here, 18 seconds to 18 seconds) approaching the inter-block interval period (for example, 18 seconds). 20.4 seconds) special control is performed.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment finishes digesting all of the predetermined number (30 times in this case) of the symbol variation when the loss is obtained in all of the predetermined number of symbol variations from the timing t4. In the meantime, control is performed so that a success effect does not appear in the challenge challenge effect on whether or not a new round game (game block) is further executed. Then, when all of the predetermined number of symbol variations (30 times in this case) have been exhausted without the success effect appearing, it seems as if the time-short state (high probability time-short state) has occurred and the advantageous state effect has appeared. We are going to perform the production.

  That is, in this case, even if a predetermined number (30 times in this case) of the symbol variation has already been digested since the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state) at timing t4, In the big hit game started from the timing t1, the challenge challenge production was failed in the fifth inter-block interval period, and it was controlled to be in the short time state (high probability short time state) without performing the sixth game block. This makes it possible to make the user feel unfortunate that he has missed the prize ball as much as the complete bonus performance has not appeared.

  However, even if such an additional challenge production fails, in practice, a predetermined number (30 times here) of symbol fluctuations is consumed after the short-time state (high probability short-time state) has occurred. However, there was virtually no demerit for the player. In addition, if a specific type of big hit is obtained with a symbol variation exceeding a predetermined number after the occurrence of the short-time state (high-probability short-time state) at timing t4, the above round roll-up effect is started again from the beginning. As a result, the game can be resumed with the expectation of further appearance.

  According to such a configuration, a simple boundary (the 30th loss fluctuation) is simply determined as to whether or not a predetermined number (30 times in this case) of symbol fluctuations has been exceeded after the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state). And the 31st missile fluctuation), it will be able to have a great impact on the player's feelings, and will prevent the dripping that tends to occur when a favorable state is maintained over a long period of time. A game can be provided.

  Further, the short time state (high probability short time state) occurring at the timing t4 functions as a period having a substantially infinite length unless a big hit is obtained. Therefore, even if a part of the period (a period until a predetermined number of times (30 times in this case) is exceeded) is shown not to be in a time-saving state, the remaining period (a predetermined period) The period after the specified number of times (30 times in this case) is still functioning as a period with an infinite length, so there is a sense of incongruity and disadvantages when viewed from the player. Can hardly be generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a part of such a short time state (high probability short time state) (until a predetermined specific number of times (here, 30 times)) is exceeded. Period) as if it was a period in which the jackpot game started from timing t1 is still being performed (the fifth inter-block interval period), and after the short-time state (high probability short-time state) has occurred It is supposed that an effect that makes it appear as if a short time state (high probability short time state) has newly occurred at an intermediate stage exceeding a predetermined number of times in advance is performed.

  In other words, in this case, since a part of the time-short state (high probability time-short state) seems to be a period in which the big hit game is still being played, it is possible to improve the gaming interest. become.

  In addition, whether or not the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state) occurs at a later timing (the timing at which a predetermined number of symbol variations (30 times in this case) has been consumed) Therefore, even if the win is actually obtained at a relatively late stage (for example, 50 times) in the short time state (high probability short time state), an advantageous game period It is expected that the winning will be felt at a relatively early stage (for example, 20 times) from the occurrence of (long-term guarantee period), and this makes it difficult to win in an advantageous gaming period. The fall of the game entertainment at the time can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the time-short state (high-probability short-time state) after that when the time-short state (high-probability time-short state) has been lost in all of the predetermined number (30 in this case) of symbol variations, The special control by the main control MPU 4100a is not performed, and as is well known, the big hit (step S142), the small hit (step S144), the reach (step S146), and the non-reach (step) based on the result of the big hit determination. One of a plurality of variation times prepared for S147) is determined by lottery, and the determined variation time (variation time that is generally longer than when the above-described special control is performed (particularly in the case of loss variation) ) Will be performed (advantageous state effect).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time-short state (high probability time-short state) is controlled so as not to be terminated unless a big hit is obtained. It is determined whether the number of fluctuations (number of loss fluctuations) after being controlled to a state (high probability short-time state) has exceeded 10,000 times, and when it exceeds 10,000 times, the short-time state (high probability short-time state) ) May be terminated. In short, it may be set so long as it is substantially (99% or more) set for the purpose of “not terminated unless a big hit is obtained”.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an extra challenge effect is performed every time a game block ends in a big hit game according to a specific type of big hit, but the extra challenge effect is not necessarily performed. Also good. For example, if a special result appears in the extra challenge production, if it is indicated that two (multiple) new game blocks will be further executed, the game block for the number of times will be executed. It is possible to avoid adding a challenge effect. That is, in this case, it is more advantageous for the player than the case where it is shown that one game block is further performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the flow of production progress as a concept for the above-described round roll-up production performed based on the fact that a specific type of jackpot has been obtained.

  In other words, as described above, the round roll-up effect is started based on the fact that a specific type of jackpot is obtained when in the short-time state (high probability short-time state), and according to the specific type of jackpot The jackpot game started when a specific type of jackpot is first obtained, as long as it is looped between the period in which the jackpot game is performed and the period in which the above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed (time-short state) Is performed as one of the purposes to make it appear as if it continues without being terminated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 162, while being controlled in the short-time state (high-precision short-time state), a specific type of jackpot is first obtained at the point P1, and the first game block (1- 4 rounds) is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates that, at the point P1, a total of four round games are continuously executed (the jackpot game is not finished yet) from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. Control is performed so that the image appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in the figure, the image is shifted along the solid line from the point P1 upward).

  Then, assuming that the round image for 4 times has been completely digested while the effect image showing that the round game for a total of 4 times is continuously executed (the jackpot game has not been finished yet) has appeared, The point P2 shown in FIG. 162 arrives.

  At this point P2, the second game block (4 to 8 rounds) can be executed from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a total of eight round games continuously at the point P2 from the time when the specific type of big hit is first obtained (the big hit game has not yet ended). The effect image to be shown is controlled to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (when the inter-block interval period ends, in the figure, the transition is made along the solid line from the point P2 upward).

  However, at the point P2 where the round game for four times has been completed since the first jackpot of the specific type was obtained, the second game block (4-8) from when the jackpot of the specific type was first obtained. Round) is not always executed. For example, when the big hit of the specific type obtained first is “4R probability variable big hit”, the big hit game is ended at the point P2 where the round game for a total of four times has been consumed, and then the time-saving state ( A high probability time-short state) occurs (in the figure, the point changes from the point P2 to the right along the dotted line).

  In this regard, the time-short state (high probability time-short state) generated at such point P2 is the target of the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a. Therefore, at the point P2 where the round game for a total of four times has been consumed since the first time when the specific type of jackpot was obtained, the second game block (4 to 8) from when the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. Even if the round is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not stop the predetermined number (30 times in this case) of the symbol variation after the time-short state (high probability time-short state) has occurred. On the condition that a specific type of jackpot is obtained again, a total of eight round games will be executed continuously (without the jackpot game being finished yet) from the time the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. An effect image indicating that this occurs (when the time is pulled back early in the short-time state (high probability short-time state), and in the figure, it has shifted along the dotted line in the right direction from the point P2. Further displacement along the dotted line in the upward direction at the branch point of "30G").

  In other words, in this case, if it was originally a specific type of jackpot, the effect that indicates that a total of four round games will be executed continuously, and the specific type of jackpot will be obtained again at least. The effect that shows that the round game for 4 times is continuously executed should appear in sequence, but even if the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of a specific type is finished, the symbol variation of 30 times When a big hit of a specific type is obtained before the game is digested, it is considered that the big hit game has not ended (in the figure, along the dotted line upward from “30G”) In other words, an effect indicating that a total of eight round games are continuously executed from when the jackpot of a specific type is first obtained is performed.

  However, the special control by the main control MPU 4100a has already been completed when a specific type of jackpot is obtained after 30 symbol variations have been digested since the jackpot game corresponding to the specific type of jackpot has been completed. Therefore, even as an effect by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, it is not regarded as an effect that the big hit game has not ended.

  That is, in this case, the round accumulation effect that has been produced so as to accumulate the number of round games from the point P1 is temporarily ended (in the figure, the transition is made along the dotted line from “30G” downward). Then, when a specific type of jackpot is obtained again, this is regarded as “the first jackpot of the specific type obtained first”, and the round roll-up effect is re-executed from the point P1 (see FIG. Among them, the lowermost stage changes along a dotted line extending toward P1).

  On the other hand, in the figure, the transition point is “30G” after the transition from the point P2 along the solid line in the upward direction (has passed the inter-block interval period) or the transition from the point P2 along the dotted line in the right direction. It was further shifted along the dotted line in the upward direction (It was regarded as a production that a big hit of a specific type was obtained and the big hit game was not finished before 30 symbol fluctuations were digested. In the case of the game, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an effect image indicating that a total of eight round games have been continuously executed (the jackpot game has not been finished yet) since the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. Will appear in Then, while the effect image showing that the round game for a total of 8 times is continuously executed (the jackpot game has not yet ended) has appeared, the round game for 4 times has been newly digested ( If a total of eight round games have been consumed, the point P3 shown in FIG. 162 will arrive.

  At this point P3, the third game block (9th to 12th rounds) can be executed from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a total of 12 round games at the point P3 when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained (without the jackpot game being finished yet). The effect image to be shown is controlled to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (when the inter-block interval period ends, in the figure, the transition is made along the solid line from the point P3 upward).

  In addition, as a pattern passing through such an effect progress route (pattern passing through the inter-block interval period at point P3), in addition to the case where 12R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit is obtained at point P1, 4R at point P1. This applies to cases where a probabilistic big hit was obtained, but an 8R probable big hit, 12R probable big hit or 16R probable big hit was obtained before the time of the short-time state at point P2 before 30 symbol variations were digested. sell.

  However, at the point P3 where the round game for 8 times is completed after the first jackpot of the specific type is obtained, the third game block (9-12) from the time when the jackpot of the specific type is first obtained. Round) is not always executed. For example, in addition to the case where the big hit of the specific type obtained first is “8R probability variation big hit”, the 4R probability variation big hit was obtained at point P1, but 30 times the symbol fluctuation occurred after the time-short state occurred at point P2. Even if 4R probability variation jackpot is obtained again before the game is digested, the jackpot game is ended at the point P3 where the round game for eight times has been digested, and then the short-time state (high probability short-time) (In the drawing, the state changes from the point P3 so as to follow the dotted line in the right direction).

  In this respect, the short time state (high probability short time state) generated at such point P3 is also the target of the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a. Accordingly, at the point P3 where the total of eight round games have been consumed since the first win of the specific type was obtained, the third game block (9 to 12) from when the big win of the specific type was first obtained. Even if the round is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not stop the predetermined number (30 times in this case) of the symbol variation after the time-short state (high probability time-short state) has occurred. On the condition that a specific type of jackpot is obtained again, a total of 12 round games are executed continuously (the jackpot game is not yet finished) from when the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. An effect image indicating this appears (when it is pulled back early in a short time state, in the figure, after changing along the dotted line in the right direction from the point P3, "30G" Further displacement along the dotted line in the upward direction at a branch point).

  In other words, in this case, if it was originally a specific type of jackpot, an effect indicating that a total of eight round games have been continuously executed and a specific type of jackpot were again obtained and at least The effect that shows that the round game for 4 times is continuously executed should appear in sequence, but even if the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of a specific type is finished, the symbol variation of 30 times When a big hit of a specific type is obtained before the game is digested, it is considered that the big hit game has not ended (in the figure, along the dotted line upward from “30G”) In other words, an effect indicating that a total of 12 round games are continuously executed from when the jackpot of a specific type is first obtained is performed.

  However, in the same way, when the big hit of a specific type is obtained after the symbol variation of 30 times has been digested after the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of the specific type is finished, the above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a has already been performed. Since it is in the finished state, even if the production by the peripheral control MPU 4140a is not regarded as production that the big hit game has not been finished.

  That is, in this case, the round accumulation effect that has been produced so as to accumulate the number of round games from the point P1 is temporarily ended (in the figure, the transition is made along the dotted line from “30G” downward). Then, when a specific type of jackpot is obtained again, this is regarded as “the first jackpot of the specific type obtained first”, and the round roll-up effect is re-executed from the point P1 (see FIG. Among them, the lowermost stage changes along a dotted line extending toward P1).

  On the other hand, in the figure, after the transition from the point P3 along the solid line in the upward direction (has passed the inter-block interval period) or the transition from the point P3 along the dotted line in the right direction, the branch of “30G” The point was further shifted along the dotted line in the upward direction. (It was regarded as a stunning result that a big hit of a specific type was obtained and the big hit game was not ended before the thirty symbol variations were digested. In the case where a specific type of jackpot is first obtained, a liquid crystal display device displays an effect image indicating that a total of 12 round games are continuously executed (the jackpot game is not yet finished). Will appear at 1900. Then, while the effect image showing that the round game for a total of 12 times is continuously executed (the jackpot game has not been finished yet) appears, the round game for 4 times has been newly digested ( If a total of 12 round games have been consumed, the point P4 shown in FIG. 162 will arrive.

  At this point P4, the fourth game block (13-16 rounds) from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained can be executed. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a confirms that, at point P4, a total of 16 round games are continuously executed (the jackpot game has not yet ended) since the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. The effect image to be displayed is controlled so as to appear in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (when the inter-block interval period ends, in the drawing, the transition is made along the solid line from the point P4 upward).

In addition, as a pattern (pattern passing through the inter-block interval period at the point P4) passing through such an effect progress route, in addition to the case where the 16R probability variation big hit is obtained at the point P1,
・ If 4R probability change big hit was obtained at point P1, but 12R probability change big hit or 16R probability change big hit was obtained before point pattern 2 digested 30 times after the short-time state occurred ,
・ Although 8R probability variation jackpot was obtained at point P1, 8R probability variation jackpot or 12R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot were obtained before the short time condition occurred at point P2 before the thirty symbol variations were digested. Or
・ Although 4R probability variation jackpot was obtained at point P1, 4R probability variation jackpot was obtained before 30 symbol variations were digested after the time-short state occurred at point P2, and time-short state at point P3 This is the case, for example, when 8R probability variation big hit, 12R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit is obtained before 30 symbol fluctuations are digested.

However, at the point P4 at which 12 rounds of games have been consumed since the first win of a specific type is obtained, the fourth game block (13-16) from the time of the first win of a specific type is obtained. Round) is not always executed. For example, in addition to the case where the big hit of the specific type obtained first is “12R probability variation big hit”,
・ Although 4R probability change big hit was obtained at point P1, 4R probability change big hit was obtained again before 30 symbol fluctuations were digested after the time short state occurred at point P2, and time short state at point P3 When 4R probability change big hit is further obtained before 30 symbol fluctuations are digested after
・ When 4R probability change big hit was obtained at point P1, but 8R probability change big hit was regained before 30 symbol fluctuations were digested after the short-time state occurred at point P2,
・ When 8R probability change big hit was obtained at point P1, but when 4R probability change big hit was obtained before 30 symbol fluctuations were digested after the short-time state occurred at point P2, etc. The big hit game will be ended at the point P4 where the round game for 12 times has been consumed, and then a short time state (high probability short time state) will occur (in the figure, from the point P4 to the right) Along the dotted line).

  In this respect, the short time state (high probability short time state) generated at such point P4 is also the target of the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a. Therefore, at the point P4 at which the total 12 round games have been consumed since the first win of the specific type is obtained, the fourth game block (13 to 16) from the first win of the specific type of jackpot is obtained. Even if the round is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not stop the predetermined number (30 times in this case) of the symbol variation after the time-short state (high probability time-short state) has occurred. On the condition that the specific type of jackpot is obtained again, a total of 16 round games are executed continuously (the jackpot game is not yet finished) from when the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. An effect image indicating this appears (when it is pulled back early in a short time state, in the figure, after changing along the dotted line in the right direction from the point P4, "30 "In addition to displacement along the dotted line in the upward direction at the branch point).

  In other words, in this case, if it was originally a specific type of jackpot, an effect indicating that a total of 12 round games are continuously executed and a specific type of jackpot were again obtained and at least The effect that shows that the round game for 4 times is continuously executed should appear in sequence, but even if the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of a specific type is finished, the symbol variation of 30 times When a big hit of a specific type is obtained before the game is digested, it is considered that the big hit game has not ended (in the figure, along the dotted line upward from “30G”) In other words, an effect indicating that a total of 16 round games are continuously executed from when the jackpot of a specific type is first obtained is performed.

  However, in the same way, when the big hit of a specific type is obtained after the symbol variation of 30 times has been digested after the big hit game corresponding to the big hit of the specific type is finished, the above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a has already been performed. Since it is in the finished state, even if the production by the peripheral control MPU 4140a is not regarded as production that the big hit game has not been finished.

  That is, in this case, the round accumulation effect that has been produced so as to accumulate the number of round games from the point P1 is temporarily ended (in the figure, the transition is made along the dotted line from “30G” downward). Then, when a specific type of jackpot is obtained again, this is regarded as “the first jackpot of the specific type obtained first”, and the round roll-up effect is re-executed from the point P1 (see FIG. Among them, the lowermost stage changes along a dotted line extending toward P1).

  On the other hand, in the figure, it changes along the solid line from the point P4 upward, or after changing along the dotted line from the point P4 to the right, so as to follow the upward dotted line at the “30G” branch point. In the case of a further transition, an effect image indicating that a total of 16 round games have been continuously executed (the jackpot game has not yet been finished) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Will appear in the device 1900. Then, while the effect image showing that the round game for a total of 16 times is continuously executed (the jackpot game has not been finished yet) appears, the round game for 4 times has been newly digested ( If a total of 16 round games have been consumed, the point P5 shown in FIG. 162 will arrive.

  At this point P5, the fifth game block (17 to 20 rounds) can be executed from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates that, at the point P5, a total of 20 round games are continuously executed (the jackpot game is not yet finished) from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. The effect image to be shown is controlled to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (when the inter-block interval period ends, in the figure, the transition is made along the solid line from the point P5 upward).

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 151, the big hit that makes it possible to execute the fifth game block (17 to 20 rounds) after the big hit game is started. It is not prepared as a big hit of a specific type. Therefore, at point P5 and points with higher numerical values (such as point P6), there are essentially five or more game blocks (17 or more round games) from when the specific type of jackpot was first obtained. It cannot be executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new game block is not executed at the points P2 to P4, further the point P5, or a point having a higher numerical value (not shown). However, it is a condition that a specific type of jackpot has been obtained again before a predetermined number (30 times in this case) of symbol variation has been digested since the occurrence of a short-time state (high probability short-time state). In addition, it is possible to execute control for causing an effect image to appear that the round game is continuously executed (the jackpot game is not yet finished) from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained (time-saving state) In the figure, after changing along the dotted line in the right direction from each point, further changing along the dotted line in the upward direction at the “30G” branch point. . Accordingly, at the point P5 or a point with a higher numerical value (such as the point P6), the fifth and subsequent game blocks (17 or more round games) are executed from when the specific type of jackpot is first obtained. It will be possible.

  According to such a configuration, after a short-time state (high-probability short-time state) occurs, a big hit of a specific type continues to be obtained again before a predetermined number (30 in this case) of symbol variation is digested. As long as the game block (or jackpot game) is executed, the staged contents (high probability), while the staged contents of the stage such as “stack the number of round games from the point P1 endlessly” are gradually developed. If a win is not obtained until a predetermined number of symbol variations (30 times in this case) are digested after the occurrence of a short-time state), it will not progress to the next stage of the stage contents. The first production will be redone.

  That is, in this case, for a predetermined period (30 symbol variations) after the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state), it becomes possible to attract interest such as “whether the production content can be advanced”. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a feeling of relaxation when the player is in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state) and the gaming interest is reduced.

  Moreover, even if a big hit is not obtained in a predetermined period (30 symbol fluctuations) after the occurrence of a short-time state (high probability short-time state), the survival of the short-time state (high probability short-time state) is still guaranteed for a long time. Therefore, there is no demerit in gaming, and the game can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In addition, if a challenge such as “Can you make progress in the production contents” fails, the initial production contents will be redone, so a short period of time (high-probability time-short state) will occur for a certain period of time. The game may be resumed with a novel feeling as if the short-time state (high probability short-time state) newly occurred in the middle stage exceeding (30 symbol fluctuations) and started over from the beginning. Expected. Therefore, in practice, even if the hit is obtained at a relatively late stage in the short-time state (high probability short-time state), it is a relatively early stage from the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state). As a result, it is expected that the player feels that the player has won the game, and this makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the player cannot easily win in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state).

  It should be noted that in order to favorably exhibit such effects (for example, providing a game with sharpness by preventing sagging in a short time state that continues until a big hit is obtained), a short time state (high probability The above-mentioned special control by the main control MPU 4100a is executed over a period in which a relatively large number of fluctuations are consumed after the occurrence of the short-time state), so as to attract an interest such as “whether the production content can be advanced”. It is desirable.

  For example, if a period having a length such that the probability that a big hit is obtained during the period exceeds 50% is set as a period during which the production contents can be advanced, a short time state (high probability short time state) ) Is controlled during the period that is attracting interest, such as “Can you make progress in the production?” A game can be provided.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, even when a small hit is obtained, it is possible to prevent the above round production effect from ending. Therefore, as a period during which the production contents can be advanced, a period having a length that exceeds 50% of the probability of obtaining either a big hit or a small hit during the period may be set.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a specific type of jackpot is obtained, a prize can be obtained for the player within each period in which the game block is performed. By creating a bonus effect that suggests, and adding a challenge effect in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state) that occurs after the end of the block interval period or jackpot game between the game blocks, A round-up effect such as “how many times a game block can be executed (or how many times a round game can be executed)” is provided.

  However, in order to realize such a round production effect, it is not always necessary to separate the bonus effect and the extra challenge effect. For example, one game block and one block interval period or one Depending on how many times this block effect appears, “One game block is executed.” It is also possible to provide a presentation such as “How many times can a round game be executed?”.

  FIG. 163 shows one game block and one inter-block interval period or one time reduction in realizing a round roll-up effect when the same game control as the example shown in FIG. 161 (c) appears. It is a figure which shows the example which makes one block production appear over a state (period until a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested).

  According to the example shown in FIG. 163, in the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit B (specific type of big hit), the time until the third inter-block interval period ends. In the meantime, every time a game block (1st to 3rd game block) is performed, one block effect (1st to 3rd block effect) straddling the game block and the inter-block interval period is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The

  That is, as such a block effect, for example, whether or not such a chance to win a prize is given again while showing that a predetermined number of prizes (approximately 500 prize balls) can be obtained. By providing the performance, it is possible to provide a performance such as “how many times the game block can be executed (or how many times the round game can be executed)”. .

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 163, when the fourth game block (the 13th to 16th round games) is performed, the fourth game block (the 13th to 16th round games) is digested. Despite the end of the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit B (specific type of big hit) at the end and the short time state (high probability short time state) occurs, the fourth game The fourth block effect straddling the block and the short time state (high probability short time state) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  That is, from the occurrence of the time-short state at timing t2 until the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are digested, it is the target of the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a and has a length approximate to the inter-block interval period. It is as described above that the production time with the is secured.

  According to such a configuration, even after the big hit game (timing t1 to t2) corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit B (specific type of big hit) ends and the short time state (high probability short time state) occurs, the prize ball It becomes possible to make it appear as if the jackpot game started at the timing t1 is still being executed without being aware of the possibility that the opportunity for acquisition is continuously given as it is.

  In this regard, according to the example shown in FIG. 163, a special type of big hit (in this case, 4R probability variation) is performed before the predetermined number of symbol variations are digested while the above-described special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a. If the fifth game block is performed at timing t3 on the condition that the big hit) is obtained, the fifth block effect straddling the fifth game block and the short time state (high probability short state) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In 1900, display is performed.

  According to such a configuration, since the time-short state at the timings t2 to t3 seems to be an inter-block interval period, the big hit game started at the timing t1 (16R probability variable big hit B) has already ended at the timing t2. Despite being done, it will be possible to make it appear as though it is still running. In other words, through such control, a performance such as “how many times a game block can be executed (or how many times a round game can be executed)” is provided across multiple big hit games. Will be able to.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 163, the fourth block effect and the fifth block effect are given the opportunity to win the award again after a predetermined number of prizes (approximately 500 prize balls) have been obtained. These effects will be started while it is undecided whether it indicates whether the prize will be given or whether the award winning opportunity will not be given again.

  More specifically, as in the example of the short-time state that occurred at the timing t2, a special type of big hit (before the predetermined number of symbol variations are digested while the above-described special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a ( Here, when 4R probability variation big win) is obtained, it is determined that the opportunity for winning a prize is given again at that time, and a control for causing a successful production to appear according to the determination is performed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit is not obtained before the predetermined number of symbol variations are digested while the above-mentioned special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a as in the example of the short-time state occurring at the timing t3. The control is performed so that the success effect does not appear until a predetermined number of symbol variations have been consumed. Then, when the predetermined number of symbol variations have been consumed, the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a is also terminated. After that, based on the result of the big hit determination, any of the variation times prepared for the big hit (step S142), the small hit (step S144), the reach (step S146), and the non-reach (step S147). A well-known effect is performed such that the symbol is determined by lottery and the symbol variation with the determined variation time is performed (advantageous state effect).

  In this way, even in the example shown in FIG. 163, a round-up effect such as “how many times a game block can be executed (or how many times a round game can be executed)” (see FIG. Among them, it is possible to provide a portion surrounded by a thick frame) over a plurality of big hit games.

  In addition, a predetermined period (30 symbol fluctuations) after the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state) can attract interest such as “can the content of the performance be advanced”? It is possible to prevent the feelings of relaxation when the time is short (high probability short time) and the game entertainment is reduced.

  Moreover, even if a big hit is not obtained in a predetermined period (30 symbol fluctuations) after the occurrence of a short-time state (high probability short-time state), the survival of the short-time state (high probability short-time state) is still guaranteed for a long time. Therefore, there is no demerit in gaming, and the game can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  In addition, if a challenge such as “Can you make progress in the production contents” fails, the initial production contents will be redone, so a short period of time (high-probability time-short state) will occur for a certain period of time. The game may be resumed with a novel feeling as if the short-time state (high probability short-time state) newly occurred in the middle stage exceeding (30 symbol fluctuations) and started over from the beginning. Expected. Therefore, in practice, even if the hit is obtained at a relatively late stage in the short-time state (high probability short-time state), it is a relatively early stage from the occurrence of the short-time state (high probability short-time state). As a result, it is expected that the player feels that the player has won the game, and this makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the player cannot easily win in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state).

  However, in order to suitably obtain these functions and effects, in any case of the example shown in FIG. 161 and the example shown in FIG. 163, after the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is completed. It is important to show the period until a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are consumed in the short time state (high probability short time state) as if it is an inter-block interval period.

  Therefore, in a period until a predetermined number of symbol variations are digested in the short time state (high probability short time state), the decorative symbols are displayed smaller in the corners of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as not to stand out. It is desirable. Also, in the short-time state (high probability short-time state), it remains in the player's impression such as production using a predetermined movable accessory in both the period until a predetermined number of symbol variations are consumed and the inter-block interval period. In order to make mistakes in these periods, it is effective to make an easy production appear or to make an effect image that prompts the player to make a right strike.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-described functions and effects, the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed in either case of the example shown in FIG. 161 or the example shown in FIG. 163. is important.
Hereinafter, the principle of realizing the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a will be described.

  Here, as described above, the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is a big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit (16R positive variation big hit B, 12R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit, 4R positive variable big hit) as described above. Is a period of time (short time state) until the special symbol is consumed (30 times in this case) after the time is finished and a short time state (high probability short time normal state) occurs The second so that the variation time at the big hit selected as the number of hits is obtained becomes longer (the variation time at the selected big hit becomes shorter as the number of variations is obtained). This is control for changing the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation pattern setting process.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the short-time state (high probability short-time state) that occurs after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit of a specific type on the second starting port 2102 side ends, As long as the game is played so that the lottery (decision of jackpot) for the second special symbol is not lost (unless the value of the second special holding number counter is “0”), the lottery for the first special symbol As described above, only the lottery (big hit determination) for the second special random number is continuously performed without interruption regardless of the on-hold status.

  FIG. 164 shows the number of changes in the special symbol (from 1 to 30 rotations) after the big hit game state based on a specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side (or the small hit game state based on the small hit) is finished. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table referred in the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process according to.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is
・ The number of special symbol fluctuations is in the 1st to 5th state after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side ends (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit ends) In this case, the first fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 164 (a) is referred to in the second fluctuation pattern setting process,
・ After the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second starting port 2102 side is finished (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit is finished), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is in the sixth to tenth state. In this case, the second variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 164 (b) is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process,
-The number of changes in the special symbol is in the 11th to 15th state after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second starting port 2102 side ends (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit ends) In this case, the third variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 164 (c) is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process,
-The number of changes in the special symbol is in the 16th to 20th state after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second starting port 2102 side ends (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit ends) In this case, the fourth variation pattern table T4 shown in FIG. 164 (d) is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process,
-The number of times the special symbol fluctuates is in the 21st to 25th state after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side ends (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit ends) In this case, the fifth fluctuation pattern table T5 shown in FIG. 164 (e) is referred to in the second fluctuation pattern setting process,
・ The number of special symbol fluctuations is in the 26th to 30th state after the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side ends (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit ends) In this case, the sixth variation pattern table T6 shown in FIG. 164 (f) is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process.

  According to such a configuration, the number of changes in the special symbol since the big hit gaming state corresponding to the specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side is ended (or the small hit gaming state based on the small hit is ended). Is within 1 to 30 revolutions, when the loss is obtained, the same control mode (here, uniform 0.1 seconds) is adopted regardless of the number of fluctuations. A control mode (18 seconds-> 15 seconds-> 12 seconds-> 9 seconds-> 6 seconds-> 3 seconds) with a tendency to select a shorter time as the number of fluctuations increases when a big hit is obtained is adopted. Become.

  In particular, according to the control mode shown in FIG. 164, when a special symbol jackpot is obtained for the time required to digest the loss variation five times each time the special symbol variation count increases five times. The variation time adopted for is set to be short.

  According to such a configuration, unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is set to “0”, a special type jackpot is obtained when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the first time, and the special symbol When the number of fluctuations is not the first time but increases five times (from the sixth time), when the big hit of a specific type is obtained, the second start port 2102 side is specified even though the number of fluctuations is different. The time from the end of the jackpot game state based on the type of jackpot to the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot of the specific type can be made the same.

  In this embodiment, the content of the variation pattern table referred to in the second variation pattern setting process is changed every time the number of variations of the special symbol is digested by a predetermined number (here, five times). Thus, desired operational effects (such as operational effects relating to “convergence” described later, or operational effects related to “table change while one effect is being performed” described later) are obtained. However, the timing of changing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table may be every time the special symbol is changed once, and if the desired effect is obtained, the number of times the special symbol is changed is three. You may make it change when different frequency | count conditions are satisfy | filled, such as the time of being performed and the time of being performed 6 times.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment has a special symbol variation count within 1 to 30 revolutions after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side is terminated. When a loss is obtained, control is performed to select 0.1 seconds regardless of the number of fluctuations. However, in the case of realizing such control, during the same period, it is set so that all reach random numbers match only the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached, or the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed. Even if they match, it is set so that the control for selecting 0.1 second is performed, or the determination of whether to reach or not is performed, and the fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T6 at the time of non-reach are selected. Either of these methods will be adopted.

  FIG. 165 shows that the main control MPU 4100a advances the game based on the control mode shown in FIG. 164 while maintaining the value of the second special hold number counter at “1” or more, and as a result, the number of changes in the special symbol is It is a figure which shows the time (y second) required after the big hit game state is complete | finished until the variation time of the symbol according to this big hit is complete | finished when the big hit of a specific classification is obtained x times.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 165, when a special type of big hit is obtained when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the first, the second fluctuation pattern setting process Since one fluctuation pattern table T1 is referred to, the time required from the end of the big hit gaming state to the end of the symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the big hit is 18 seconds. And until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 5 times, every time the number of fluctuations required for obtaining the big hit of a specific type is increased by one, the time required for the loss fluctuation (0.1 seconds) and the loss symbol The total time (0.6 seconds) with the time required for the stop (0.5 seconds) is increased by the time required from the end of the jackpot gaming state to the end of the symbol variation time corresponding to the jackpot. (18 seconds → 18.6 seconds → 19.2 seconds → 19.8 seconds → 20.4 seconds).

  However, as shown in FIG. 164 (b) and FIG. 165, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the sixth, the second fluctuation pattern table T2 is referred to in the second fluctuation pattern setting process. Therefore, if a special type of big hit is obtained when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the sixth, the time required for the loss fluctuation in the first fluctuation pattern table T1 (0.1 seconds) and the stop of the loss symbol A time obtained by adding the total time (0.6 seconds) to the required time (0.5 seconds) for five times, and a variation time (15 seconds) at the time of a big hit of a specific type set in the second variation pattern table T2. The total time (18 seconds) is the time required from the end of the jackpot gaming state to the end of the symbol variation time corresponding to the jackpot. And until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10, each time the number of fluctuations required until a specific type of jackpot is increased, the time required for the loss fluctuation (0.1 seconds) and the loss symbol The total time (0.6 seconds) with the time required for the stop (0.5 seconds) is increased by the time required from the end of the jackpot gaming state to the end of the symbol variation time corresponding to the jackpot. (18 seconds → 18.6 seconds → 19.2 seconds → 19.8 seconds → 20.4 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation time adopted when a specific type of jackpot is obtained is such that the variation in the loss is digested five times each time the variation number of the special symbol is increased five times. So as to be shortened by the time required to perform (the total time (0.6 seconds) of the time required to change the loss (0.1 seconds) and the time required to stop the loss symbol (0.5 seconds)) Is set to As a result, as shown in FIG. 165, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit of the specific type on the second start port 2102 side is 1 to 30 rotations, Regardless of which symbol win is obtained, the next big hit game (hit game according to a specific type of big hit) starts after the previous big hit game (hit game according to a specific type of big hit) ends It becomes possible to converge the time required for the process within a specific time width (here, 18 seconds to 20.4 seconds).

  That is, at least 17.4 seconds between the timing at which the first symbol variation is started and the timing at which the 30th symbol variation is started after 29 loss variations have occurred , 29 times of symbol stop time in total). Nevertheless, even if a particular type of jackpot is obtained for any symbol variation, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot is digested after the previous jackpot game (a jackpot game corresponding to a particular category jackpot) is completed. Since there is only 2.4 seconds, which is less than half of the time required to finish, it is difficult to notice that up to 30 symbol variations can be made during that period. Will be able to.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the time required for one specific effect that appears when a specific effect condition is satisfied is included in the specific time width thus converged. . That is, in this case, within the period from the end of the previous jackpot game (a jackpot game according to a specific type of jackpot) to the start of the next jackpot game (a jackpot game according to a specific type of jackpot) By performing such a specific effect, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the specific effect condition is satisfied in a period in which the symbol variation is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, “a new round game (game block) is generated after a predetermined time” within a specific time range (here, 18 seconds to 20.4 seconds) converged by special control by the main control MPU 4100a. The time (18 seconds set as the inter-block interval period) required for execution of the “additional challenge effect suggesting the possibility of starting” is included. As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the interval between blocks is over a plurality of symbol variations (here, 18 seconds to 20.4 seconds) in which special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a. As with, the “hit challenge production that suggests the possibility of starting a new round game (game block) after a predetermined time” (one production) appears, so that the big hit game according to the big hit of a specific type ends. Even in the short time period (until the symbol variation is performed 30 times at the maximum), it will be possible to show as if the big hit game is still continuing (as if it is an inter-block interval period) .

  According to such a configuration, it is a case where a specific type of jackpot is obtained in any of the first to thirtyth symbol variations after the end of the previous jackpot game (a jackpot game corresponding to a specific type of jackpot). Also, the extra challenge effect (one effect) that is executed from the time when the first symbol variation is started, the period until the symbol variation with which a specific type of jackpot has been consumed (any one of 1 to 30 times) It will appear over the time required for the number of symbol variations to finish digesting. In other words, in this case, unless a specific type of jackpot is obtained in the first symbol variation, at the time of starting the extra challenge production, it is undecided whether or not to make a successful production appear in the production, It is determined that a successful production will appear when starting the symbol variation in which a specific type of jackpot has been obtained (or when the jackpot determination for obtaining a specific type of jackpot has been put on hold), and based on the determination A successful production will appear in the production.

  However, even if a particular type of jackpot is obtained with any symbol variation, the timing for the successful control to appear in such an additional challenge effect starts the period that is subject to special control by the main control MPU 4100a. Setting to arrive after the timing when 17.6 seconds have passed since the start (the timing at which the 30th symbol variation is started when the 30th symbol variation is performed) It is more desirable for the production to function as one specific production.

  That is, conventionally, since one specific effect was executed by referring to one fluctuation pattern table, when one specific effect is started, the contents of the effect are displayed at the start time. As a result, it was possible to assume a certain level of concern, and there was concern about a decline in the amusement interest. More specifically, when an effect is to be realized in accordance with the progress of the game, it is basically required to determine in advance how much variation time is to be performed at the start of the effect. It is done. This has contributed to the fact that the contents of the production are easily assumed by the player.

  In this regard, in the present application, first, one specific effect over a plurality of symbol variations is realized. And on this, while one specific effect is advanced and multiple symbol variations are sequentially performed, the association content referred to when each variation time is determined is changed to another association content. did. That is, in this case, since the one specific effect (addition challenge effect) is in the middle of being executed, the change pattern determination mode itself is changed a plurality of times, so when the one specific effect starts. In addition to making it difficult for the contents to be assumed by the player side, the variations of the production become diverse, and the decline in the gaming interest is suppressed.

  In addition, as an effect in a specific time width converged by special control by the main control MPU 4100a (one specific effect over a plurality of symbol variations), it may not be an effect performed in the big hit game, For example, it may be one high expectation effect (reach effect, etc.) that appears within one symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination.

  In other words, the one specific effect according to the present application is based on the premise that the jackpot determination is performed a plurality of times (here, a maximum of 30 times), and therefore, the period during which the symbol variation for one time is performed. When compared with the production in the house, the expectation degree that the big hit is obtained within the period in which the one specific production is performed is relatively high (here, 30 times). Therefore, as an effect in the time span converged by special control by the main control MPU 4100a (one specific effect across multiple symbol variations), one high that appears within one symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination By making the expected performance (such as reach production) appear, the player will be able to enjoy the highly anticipated performance without any discomfort, and will get a big hit in the short-time state (high probability short-time state). Decrease in game entertainment when it is not possible (game entertainment over 30 symbol variations) can be suppressed. In this case, the time required for a specific high expectation effect (reach effect, etc.) that appears within one symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is included in the specific time width converged by the special control by the main control MPU 4100a. Will be.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is able to receive the symbols even when all the symbol variations are lost in the period (30 symbol variations) to be subjected to the special control described above. The total time required to digest the fluctuation (18 seconds, which is the total time of 30 fluctuation fluctuations and 30 symbol stop times) is converged to a specific time width (18 seconds to 20.20). 4 seconds). That is, in this case, since the effect can be converged within a specific time width including the case where the successful effect does not appear in one specific effect, the pattern variation for 30 times at the maximum in the period. It becomes even more difficult to notice what is being done, and it is possible to make it appear as if one specific effect that appears when a specific effect condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment has the second special symbol even within the period (30 symbol variations) to be subjected to the special control described above. As a result of the big hit judgment on the side, if a big hit other than a specific type (16R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) or the first special symbol side big hit (not shown) is obtained, Only the symbol variation with the time associated with each appears, and it does not converge within a specific time width. In other words, if these jackpots are obtained, how many rounds will be accumulated after a successful presentation appears in the challenge presentation with additional round games (game blocks) to be executed further? A complete bonus effect that completes the effect appears, or a new round game (game block) is added, and the challenge effect is terminated midway, and an advantageous state (short-time state and jackpot game is looped) As described above, an advantageous end effect (or a battle victory effect, a battle defeat effect, or the like) that suggests the possibility that the (possible state) will be ended is performed.

  However, as described above, the specific time width converged by the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a is based on the condition that the state of holding the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side is maintained. There is no convergence within a specific time width when the hold state of the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side is not maintained. And one specific effect (one extra such as an extra challenge effect) on the premise that it converges within a specific time range even though it is no longer converged within a specific time range in this way If an effect is performed, the player may recognize that the original period in which the one specific effect is performed (such as an inter-block interval period) may not be recognized, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors whether or not the second special symbol side jackpot determination hold state is maintained during the period in which the above-described special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed at least. Based on the fact that it is determined that the big hit determination hold state is no longer maintained, one specific effect (addition challenge effect, etc.) may be terminated halfway (the special control flag is reset). However, in this case, after finishing one specific production (addition challenge production, etc.) in the middle, a predetermined production appears, and while the production appears, changes in special symbols for the remaining number of times. It will be digested. Further, even if a specific type of jackpot is obtained before the remaining number of times is exhausted, the round roll-up effect (the effect having a plurality of stages) is executed in the form of redoing the initial effect content.

  According to such a configuration, the round roll-up effect (multi-stage effect) is continued depending on the player's intention (depending on the operation), or the round roll-up effect (multi-stage effect) is redone from the first effect content. You will be able to make it.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as described above, when an advantageous end effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous state (a state in which a short-time state and a jackpot game can be looped) is terminated appears. Even so, there is a possibility that the challenge production will be resumed.

  In other words, the advantageous end effect is an additional challenge effect in the middle of whether or not a new round game (game block) is further executed when a 2R probability variable big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit that is not a specific type. It appears after it is finished. Then, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU 4100a, when the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is obtained as a big hit that is not a specific type even during the period in which the above-described special control is performed, As described above, a certain time (10 seconds) is selected as the time required for such an advantageous end effect regardless of the number of symbol fluctuations.

  In this regard, when the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment first obtains the small hit game, the main control MPU 4100a starts the small hit game in the same manner as when the big hit game corresponding to the specific type of big hit is performed. By resetting the variation counter and setting the special control flag after the small hit game has been performed, the special symbol after the small hit game that was started in the short-time state is ended. The above-described special control (main control MPU 4100a), control related to the add-on challenge effect (peripheral control MPU 4140a), etc. are also performed during a period (short time state) until a predetermined number of changes (here, 30 times) are consumed. I have to.

  Then, if a small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 164, within the period during which the above-described special control is performed, a fixed time (here, 2R probability change) regardless of the number of symbol fluctuations. 10 seconds as in the case where a big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained is selected. Then, at a certain time selected in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes an advantageous end effect that suggests the possibility of the advantageous state (a state in which the short-time state and the big hit game can be looped) to end. .

  In other words, the advantageous end effect according to this embodiment causes the common (specific) production content to appear until the specific branch timing for the progress of the production content arrives, while the specific branch timing has arrived. In some cases, the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is obtained, and the production mode advances to the contents indicating that the advantageous state (the state in which the short-time state and the big hit game can be looped) is terminated, and the advantageous The state (the state in which the short-time state and the big hit game can be looped) is not ended, and the presentation is progressed to the content that indicates that the added challenge effect has been revived once it has been suspended and will continue to be executed. One of at least two effect results with the effect mode can appear.

  According to such a configuration, when a small hit is obtained within the period in which the above-described special control is performed, the extra challenge effect is temporarily stopped and it appears as if the advantageous state is ended. Later, since the add-on challenge production that was once terminated half-way will revive and continue to be executed continuously, the game value as a conventional small hit (value that gives the opportunity to win a predetermined number of balls, Alternatively, it becomes possible to provide the player with a value higher than the value that makes the player aware of the possibility of being in a high probability state, and to improve the game entertainment.

  For example, in the short time state (high probability short time state) occurring at the timing t4 shown in FIG. 161 (a), the above-described special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a, and a new round game (game block) is performed. It is assumed that a small hit is obtained instead of the 16R probability variable big hit A during the extra challenge production about whether or not is started. Then, despite the above-described special control performed by the main control MPU 4100a, first, there is a pattern variation (small hit) having a certain time (10 seconds here) that does not converge within a specific time width. Be started. Next, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, after the additional challenge production is temporarily stopped halfway, an advantageous state (a state in which a short time state and a big hit game can be looped) may be ended. An advantageous end effect is performed. Then, when a specific branch timing arrives in the advantageous end effect, the advantageous state (the state in which the short-time state and the big hit game can be looped) is not ended, and the add-on challenge effect that has been temporarily ended There will be a production mode in which the production progresses to the content indicating that it will be resumed after being revived. In addition, such an effect (including an effect when 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit is obtained) is controlled to display one predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination. In such a case, it is not determined whether or not a specific branch timing has arrived at an intermediate stage.

  In other words, in this case, when a small hit game is executed after such an effect mode appears (or during the appearance of such an effect mode), the small hit game ends first (special control flag) The above-mentioned special control (main control MPU 4100a) is also performed in a period (time-short state) from when the special symbol variation is digested to a predetermined number (in this case, 30 times). Then, while such special control is being performed, the add-on challenge effect once suspended is restored, and the effect content (the fifth game block (20 round games)) that has been performed at the timing t4 is restored. In the finished state, an effect content regarding whether or not a new round game (game block) is further started appears.

  According to such a game using small hits and control related to the development of effects, even if an advantageous end effect appears, an advantageous state (a state in which a short time state and a big hit game can be looped) is not ended. You will be able to leave possibilities.

  In addition, since the special control flag is set when the small hit game corresponding to the small hit is ended, the period during which the above-mentioned special control (main control MPU 4100a) is performed in the time-saving state (the above-described round accumulation effect is continued). If the small hit is obtained when the remaining period is a period with a small remaining period, the period during which the above-described special control (main control MPU 4100a) is performed can be significantly recovered (recovered to the initial value (30 times)). As a result, it can be made to function as an increase in the continuation rate for the above-described rounded-up production effect, such as “how many times can a game block (round game for 4 rounds) be executed as a unit”? It becomes like this. That is, in this case, according to the example shown in FIG. 161 (a), it is possible to avoid the end of the one prize ball acquisition game started at the timing t1 and the rounded roll-up effect corresponding thereto. The small hits function so as to survive, and such small hits can improve the game entertainment without imposing a heavy burden on the hall side.

  In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable to make a success effect appear in the challenge effect even when a small hit is obtained. After that, a small hit gaming state is generated in a manner that makes it easy to acquire a winning ball, and when the small hit gaming state is generated, an effect of urging the player to win the big winning opening 2103 by right-handed is performed. It is desirable to make it.

  In addition, various control when such a small hit is obtained is a time period (predetermined condition (a big hit of a specific type, It is desirable that this is performed not only in the period from when the small hit) is established until the special symbol is digested 30 times), but also when the small hit is obtained after the period ends.

  In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned advantageous state effect is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player is aiming to obtain a big win in the short-time state (high-probability short-time state), and the small hit is obtained. In this case, it seems that a period (inter-block interval period) in which one prize ball acquisition game is performed suddenly occurs and a new extra challenge production is started. Moreover, it is expected that a big hit can be obtained with a probability exceeding 50% in the period of sudden occurrence (in fact, a high probability short-time state over a maximum of 30 symbol variations after the end of the small hit game). (See FIG. 151 (a)), normally, the big hit game is actually performed before 30 symbol variations are performed. Therefore, in such a period of sudden occurrence, a round-up effect such as “how many times can a game block (round game for 4 rounds) be executed as a unit” be generated? You will be able to show, and you will be able to improve your game entertainment.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the inter-block interval period existing between the game blocks in the jackpot game corresponding to the specific type of jackpot and the special control by the main control MPU 4100a are performed. New round games, both in the period of time (the period from when a predetermined condition (big hit or small hit of a specific type) is established until a predetermined number of special symbol changes (here, 30 times) is consumed) It will be a challenge to add more about what will be executed.

  However, in the inter-block interval period, a predetermined game result (whether a new game block (new round game) appears) when the period occurs and a time (18 seconds) required for production Are determined, in the period when the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, a game result (whether a new game block (new round game) appears) when the period occurs, and The time required for production is undecided. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the loss fluctuation mainly appears in the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed (approximately 20/21), but the loss fluctuation is 0.1 second. Therefore, if an attempt is made to produce a common performance (addition challenge production) during these periods, there is a concern that the content of the production may become monotonous and the game entertainment interest may decline.

  Against this backdrop, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment operates the predetermined operation means (for example, the upper part) in both the inter-block interval period and the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed. An operation effect reception period for receiving a press operation on the dish effect button 257, a touch operation on the touch panel 246, etc.) is generated, and when the operation is received in the operation effect reception period, an expectation degree that a success effect appears in the extra challenge effect (0 % Or 100% may be included in the operation effect (for example, an effect whose degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the image or the operation mode of the movable body).

  FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using the operation effect reception period within the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed.

  First, in describing a control example of effects within a period in which special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, first, a control example of effects (addition challenge effect) within an inter-block interval period will be described.

  In the inter-block interval period, as described above, a predetermined game result (whether a new game block (new round game) appears) and a time required for the production (18 seconds) when the period occurs And are defined respectively. In such an inter-block interval period, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment first generates an operation effect reception period at a timing when the first time has elapsed since the start of the inter-block interval period. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, an operation promotion display for prompting an operation on the operation means is displayed.

  In the operation effect reception period generated in this way, the display mode of the operation promotion display (or a specific display image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900) at intervals of 0.6 seconds (2 seconds on average) at the shortest ( Control that can change the color) is performed. That is, as will be described later, when an operation effect reception period occurs within a period during which special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, an effect similar to this occurs, so the inter-block interval period and the special control by the main control MPU 4100a It is expected that it will be difficult to grasp which one is controlled.

  When an operation for a predetermined operation means is accepted during an operation effect acceptance period that occurs within the inter-block interval period, an operation effect acceptance period that occurs within a period during which special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed will be described later. During the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side when the operation for the predetermined operating means is accepted and the symbol is changed at the time the operation is accepted, or the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in the hold state In the same manner as in the case where it is determined that there is something that has won a big hit, the control for causing the operation effect to appear is performed.

  The operation effect reception period ends when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received. After this, when a specific branch timing related to the progress of the production contents arrives in the inter-block interval period, the production (successful production) that definitely indicates that a new game block (new round game) will be performed appears. Thus, the effect (addition challenge effect) within the inter-block interval period ends. In this case, however, only control is performed to display a predetermined production pattern (successful production pattern having a predetermined time (18 seconds)) in the inter-block interval period. It is not determined whether or not a specific branch timing has arrived.

  On the other hand, if there is no operation on the predetermined operation means until the timing when the second time has elapsed after the operation effect reception period has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the operation effect indicating the degree of expectation that a successful effect will appear. The operation effect reception period and the operation promotion display for prompting an operation on a predetermined operation means are ended without any operation. After this, when a specific branch timing related to the progress of the production contents arrives in the inter-block interval period, the production (successful production) that definitely indicates that a new game block (new round game) will be performed appears. Thus, the effect (addition challenge effect) within the inter-block interval period ends.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the situation in which the sixth variation pattern table T6 shown in FIG. 164 (f) is referred to during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed. When a big hit of a specific type is obtained, only “3 seconds” is prepared as the variation time. Therefore, in the inter-block interval period (18 seconds), as the timing at which a specific branch timing arrives, after 15 seconds have elapsed since the occurrence of the period (the shortest jackpot variation time (here, It is desirable to arrive at 3 seconds) which is less than the remaining time). That is, in this case, a predetermined production pattern (a production pattern at the time of success with a predetermined time (18 seconds)) is set (stored) so that a successful production image appears around 15 seconds. Will be kept.

  Further, as an effect that definitely indicates that a new game block (new round game) will be performed (success effect that appears in the extra challenge effect), in addition to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the optical output on the frame side ( It is desirable to realize it as a short-time effect in which the result can be intuitively sensed such as a definite light output pattern) and a sound output (determined sound output pattern).

  Then, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is similar to this in the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed for such an effect (addition challenge effect) in the inter-block interval period. It is possible to execute a control for causing the appearance of the appearance of.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (a), it is assumed that a period during which special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a occurs at timing t11. And if the second special symbol side jackpot determination hold state is maintained (right-handed by the player is maintained), and the game has progressed without winning the jackpot in all the jackpot determination After the first loss variation is started at timing t11, the loss variation is sequentially digested at intervals of 0.6 seconds (loss variation and symbol stop time) until the 30th loss variation is completed at timing t21. It will be done. That is, in this case, the timing t21 arrives when 18 seconds have elapsed from the timing t11, and the 30th loss variation ends.

  In the period when the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the first variation pattern table T1 to the sixth variation shown in FIG. The variation pattern table referred to in the second variation pattern setting process is sequentially changed between the variation pattern tables T6. However, in each of the first variation pattern table T1 to the sixth variation pattern table T6, a specific time value (0.1 seconds) is associated with the loss in any of the tables. In the example shown in (a) (the game progresses without winning the big hit in all the big hit determinations), after the first loss variation starts at the timing t11, the 30th loss variation is digested at the timing t21. Although a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are sequentially referred to until the end of the process, eventually, the variation of the loss is sequentially digested at intervals of 0.6 seconds (the loss variation and the symbol stop time).

  In the case where such a short-term loss variation can be repeated, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first suggests that a new round game (game block) may be further executed after a predetermined time at timing t11. Add on and start the challenge production. When the add-on challenge effect is thus started, the operation effect acceptance period is generated at the timing t12 when the first time has elapsed since the start of the add-on challenge effect, as in the case of the inter-block interval period, and the predetermined operation In the liquid crystal display device 1900, an operation promotion display for prompting an operation on the means appears.

  In the operation effect reception period that occurs at timing t12, the loss variation is gradually digested at intervals of 0.6 seconds (loss change and symbol stop time). Is received, the operation effect for the big hit determination in the hold state or the fluctuation state is performed. Therefore, the jackpot determination that is the target of such an operation effect is a jackpot determination that is in a suspended state or a fluctuating state when the operation effect reception period occurs, and even a random number is still acquired when the operation effect reception period occurs. The jackpot determination that did not exist can also be targeted.

  However, on the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the big hit determination on the second special symbol side is newly put on hold by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2102, about the jackpot judgment to be put on hold Expectation degree determination (so-called prefetch determination) is performed. In the prefetch determination according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166, when the prefetched big hit determination is a loss, the larger the number, the higher the expectation that the big hit is obtained. When “1”, “2”, and “3” are determined (determined so that a relatively small number can be selected relatively easily), and when the pre-read jackpot determination is a big hit, “4” is set. Judgment is made.

  And in the operation effect reception period that occurred at the timing t12, the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in which the holding state is released and the symbol is in the changing state, or the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in the holding state The jackpot determination that is determined to have the highest expectation level in the prefetch determination is targeted, and the expectation level for the jackpot determination is determined by a change in display mode (color or the like) of the operation promotion display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown.

  More specifically, when a display mode corresponding to “1” obtained as a result of the prefetch determination is caused to appear, the operation promotion display is changed to the “blue” display mode. Similarly, when the display mode corresponding to “2” obtained as a result of the prefetch determination is caused to appear, the operation promotion display is changed to the “red” display mode and obtained as a result of the prefetch determination. When the display mode corresponding to “3” appears, the operation promotion display is changed to the “golden” display mode. On the other hand, when the display mode corresponding to “4” obtained as a result of the prefetch determination is caused to appear, the operation promotion display is changed to one of the “blue”, “red”, and “gold” display modes ( The blue color is less likely to appear than in the case of losing, and the gold color is changed more easily than in the case of losing.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in the hold state during the period when the fifteenth symbol variation shown in FIG. Are present (assuming that the jackpot determination corresponding to the 16th to 19th symbol variation is in a pending state), the look-ahead of “3” evaluated for the jackpot determination corresponding to the 18th symbol variation Since the determination is the highest degree of expectation, the operation promotion display is displayed as a display mode (gold color) according to the evaluation of “3”. And when such a display mode (golden) appears, either the hold state is released and the second special symbol side jackpot determination in which the symbol is in the fluctuation state, or the second special symbol side jackpot determination in the hold state Since it is possible to grasp that there is a relatively high possibility that a big hit has been obtained, it is possible to strongly encourage the appearance of an operation effect by an operation on a predetermined operation means.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received during the operation effect reception period generated at the timing t12, the symbol is in a fluctuating state when the operation is received. Among the jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side or the jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side that are in a holding state, are there any jackpots obtained (the result of the prefetch determination is “4”)? Or). Then, based on the result of the determination when an operation on a predetermined operation means is accepted, a high expectation is shown as an expectation that appears when an operation effect appears (an expectation that a successful effect appears in an extra challenge effect). The selection ratio is changed.

  For example, when the expectation that appears when the operation effect appears (the expectation that the success effect appears in the add-on challenge effect) is prepared in three stages (high, medium, low), and the big hit is obtained Is relatively easy to select a high expectation level and makes it difficult to select a low expectation level. When a big hit is not obtained, it is relatively difficult to select a high expectation level and a low expectation level is easily selected. By doing so, the possibility that a big hit is obtained when a high-expected performance result appears (the possibility that a big hit is obtained when a low-expected production result appears is reduced) Be able to).

  The operation effect reception period ends when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (a), the 30th loss variation ends at the timing t21 without the success effect appearing in the extra challenge effect. When the 30th loss variation is completed, the special control flag is turned off based on the count value of the variation counter reaching 30, so that the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed. And the challenge challenge effect are ended, and the above-described advantageous state effect is started. Thereby, the player grasps that the extra challenge production (round-up production production) is ended as a failure production, and plays the game under the image as if a short-time state has occurred from the timing t21. Become.

  On the other hand, when there is no operation on the predetermined operation means until timing t13 when the second time has elapsed after the operation effect reception period has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays an operation effect indicating the expected degree of appearance of the successful effect. Without performing, the operation effect reception period and the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the predetermined operation means are ended. After that, the success change is not shown in the add-on challenge effect, and the 30th loss variation ends at the timing t21. That is, in this case as well, when the 30th loss variation is completed, the special control flag is turned off based on the fact that the counter value of the variation counter has reached 30, so that the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed. The period during which the performance is performed and the challenge challenge effect are ended, and the above-described advantageous state effect is started.

  On the other hand, there may be a case where a big hit is obtained before the operation effect reception period occurs at timing t12.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), after a period in which special control by the main control MPU 4100a occurs at timing t11, a big hit is obtained in the first big hit determination (first symbol variation). Suppose that However, even in such a case, by referring to the big hit variation time from the first variation pattern table T1 (see FIG. 164 (a)), the execution time of the extra challenge effect is shown in FIG. The same or approximate time (here, the same 18 seconds) as in the example shown in a) can be adopted.

  That is, in this case, when the extra challenge effect is started at timing t11, a big hit is obtained in the first big hit determination (first symbol variation), so that the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed at a relatively early stage. The game content (whether or not a new game block (new round game) appears) and the time required for production (18 seconds) after the period to be played are determined.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a keeps these pieces of information confidential, and generates an operation effect acceptance period at the timing t12 when the first time has elapsed since the addition challenge effect was started, as in FIG. 166 (a). Thus, an operation promotion display for prompting an operation on a predetermined operation means appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (b), in the operation effect reception period that occurred at timing t12, it is determined that the hold state is released and the symbol is in a fluctuating state, and that it is a big hit. In addition, the control for indicating the big hit determination is performed, and the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is controlled by changing the display mode (color or the like) of the operation promotion display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this regard, as described above, when “4” is obtained as a result of the prefetch determination, the operation promotion display is changed to any one of the display modes of “blue”, “red”, and “golden”. However, if only one of the colors appears continuously over the operation effect reception period as the display mode of the operation promotion display, it is a big hit compared to the case of the above example shown in FIG. 166 (a). Therefore, as in the case of the above control example in the inter-block interval period, the operation-promoting display (or the liquid crystal display) is at a minimum interval of 0.6 seconds. It is determined whether or not a control (a color or the like) of a specific display image displayed on the apparatus 1900 can change the display mode (color, etc.) (which color appears every 0.6 seconds), and based on the result of the determination It is desirable to perform control to change the color. In addition, while the display mode (color) of the operation promotion display is changed in this way, control is performed such that the appearance probability (appearance frequency) of red or gold is higher than in the example shown in FIG. 166 (a). It is possible to grasp that there is a relatively high possibility that a big hit has been obtained, and to strongly encourage the appearance of an operation effect by an operation on a predetermined operation means. desirable. This desirable control example is the same for the above-described control example in the inter-block interval period.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (b), when an operation for a predetermined operation means is received within the operation effect reception period generated at the timing t12, the operation is performed. Is received, it is determined that the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination in which the symbol is in a changing state. Then, based on the determination, one of three levels (high, medium, and low) of expectations is selected in a manner in which the high expectation is relatively easy to select and the low expectation is not easily selected. As shown, an operation effect appears.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (b), the operation effect reception period ends when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received. Thereafter, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (b), a success effect appears in the extra challenge effect, and the first symbol variation (big hit variation) ends at the timing t21. When the first symbol variation (big hit variation) is completed in this way, the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is completed, and if the big hit is a specific type (or 16R probability variable big hit A), a new one is obtained. A round game (game block) is further executed. Then, each time a round game (game block) is consumed, the contents of the effect of accumulating the number of round games (game blocks) that are continuously executed are developed.

  On the other hand, when there is no operation on the predetermined operation means until timing t13 when the second time has elapsed after the operation effect reception period has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays an operation effect indicating the expected degree of appearance of the successful effect. Without performing, the operation effect reception period and the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the predetermined operation means are ended. However, even in this case, after the timing t13 elapses, the success effect appears in the extra challenge effect, and the first symbol variation (big hit variation) ends at the timing t21.

  On the other hand, a case where a big hit is obtained within the operation effect reception period that occurs at timing t12 may occur.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (c), at the timing t11, after the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a occurs, the state of holding the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side is maintained. It is assumed that a right hit by the player is maintained, and that a big hit is obtained in the 18th big hit determination (18th symbol variation). However, even in such a case, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in the second fluctuation pattern setting process is the first fluctuation pattern table T1, the second fluctuation pattern setting process, while the 17 times of fluctuation fluctuations are sequentially executed. Are sequentially changed to the variation pattern table T2, the third variation pattern table T3, and the fourth variation pattern table T4, and the variation time is changed from the fourth variation pattern table T4 in the 18th big hit variation. By being referred to (see FIG. 164 (d)), the execution time of the extra challenge effect is the same as or similar to the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a) (here, 19.2 seconds) Can be adopted.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as in the case of FIGS. 166 (a) and (b), is the timing at which the first time has elapsed since the addition challenge effect was started at the timing t11. At t12, an operation effect acceptance period is generated, and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation on a predetermined operation means appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is the same as the case shown in FIG. The subsequent game content (whether a new game block (new round game) appears) and the time required for production are in an undecided state.

  Accordingly, as in the case shown in FIG. 166 (a), the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit on the second special symbol side in which the suspended state is released and the symbol is in the fluctuating state during the operation effect reception period that occurs at timing t12. Of the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side that is in the determination or the hold state, the jackpot determination that is determined to have the highest expectation level in the pre-reading determination is targeted, and the expectation degree for the jackpot determination is expressed as the liquid crystal display device 1900. The control is performed as indicated by the change in the display mode (color, etc.) of the operation promotion display displayed at.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), when the 18th big hit determination is performed within the operation effect reception period that occurred at timing t12, the big hit is obtained as a result, and the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit Is done. Therefore, for example, if there are three jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side in the hold state during the period in which the fifteenth symbol variation shown in FIG. 166 (c) is being performed. Then (assuming that the jackpot determination corresponding to the 16th to 18th symbol variation is in a suspended state), the prefetch determination of “4” evaluated with respect to the jackpot determination corresponding to the 18th symbol variation is the highest expectation Therefore, the operation promotion display is displayed as a display mode (blue, red, or gold) according to the evaluation of “4”.

  The display mode (blue, red, or gold) according to the evaluation of “4” is operated depending on whether an operation for a predetermined operation means is received within the operation effect reception period or when the timing t13 arrives. Although it will be continued until the effect reception period is ended, when only one of the colors may appear continuously as the display mode of the operation promotion display, the above-described case shown in FIG. Compared to the case of the example, it is substantially dew that the jackpot is obtained. Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), when such a game situation occurs, the operation promotion display is displayed at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest as in the case of the above control example in the inter-block interval period. It is desirable to perform control that can change the display mode. In addition, while the display mode (color) of the operation promotion display is changed in this way, it is a big hit that control is performed so that the red and gold appearance probabilities are higher than in the example shown in FIG. 166 (a). It is more desirable to make it possible to grasp that there is a relatively high possibility of being obtained and to strongly encourage the appearance of an operation effect by an operation on a predetermined operation means.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), when an operation for a predetermined operation means is received within the operation effect reception period generated at the timing t12, depending on the timing at which the operation is received,
a. When the operation is accepted, it is determined that no big win is obtained in either the big special determination on the second special symbol side in which the symbol is in a changing state or the big special decision on the second special symbol side in the holding state, Based on this determination, one of three levels (high, medium, low) of expectations is selected in a manner in which it is relatively difficult to select a high expectation and a low expectation is easily selected. A situation in which control for causing an operation effect to appear is performed, and b. When the operation is accepted, it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in which the symbol is in a changing state or the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in the holding state, Based on the judgment, one of three levels (high, medium, and low) of expectations is selected in a manner in which a high expectation is relatively easy to select and a low expectation is difficult to select. Any situation in which control for causing an operation effect to appear is performed.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), the operation effect reception period ends when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received. Thereafter, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (c), even if any of the above-described situations a and b appears, a successful production will appear in the challenge challenge production, and the 18th time at timing t22. The symbol variation (big hit variation) will finish digesting. When the 18th symbol variation (big hit variation) is completed, the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is terminated, and if the big hit is a specific type (or 16R probability big hit A), a new one is obtained. A round game (game block) is further executed. Then, each time a round game (game block) is consumed, the contents of the effect of accumulating the number of round games (game blocks) that are continuously executed are developed.

  On the other hand, when there is no operation on the predetermined operation means until timing t13 when the second time has elapsed after the operation effect reception period has occurred, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays an operation effect indicating the expected degree of appearance of the successful effect. Without performing, the operation effect reception period and the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the predetermined operation means are ended. However, even in this case, after the timing t13 has elapsed, the success effect appears in the extra challenge effect, and the 18th symbol variation (big hit variation) ends at the timing t22.

  On the other hand, there may be a case where a big hit is obtained after the timing t13 when the second time has elapsed since the operation effect reception period has occurred.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (d), at the timing t11, after the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a occurs, the state of holding the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side is maintained. (Right-handed by the player is maintained) and the big hit is obtained in the 30th big hit determination (30th symbol variation). However, even in such a case, the variation pattern table referred to in the second variation pattern setting process is the first variation pattern table T1, the second variation pattern setting process while the 29 variations are sequentially executed. The change pattern table T2, the third change pattern table T3, the fourth change pattern table T4, the fifth change pattern table T5, and the sixth change pattern table T6 are sequentially changed, and the 30th time In the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a) as the execution time of the extra challenge effect by referring to the fluctuation time in the big hit fluctuation from the sixth fluctuation pattern table T6 (see FIG. 164 (f)). The same or approximate time (here, 20.4 seconds) can be adopted.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as in the case of FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (c), is the timing at which the first time has elapsed since the addition challenge effect was started at the timing t11. At t12, an operation effect acceptance period is generated, and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation on a predetermined operation means appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), as in the case shown in FIGS. 166 (a) and (c), the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed at the stage where the operation effect reception period occurs in this way. The game content (whether a new game block (new round game) appears) and the time required for the production after the completion of the game are in an undetermined state.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, like the case shown in FIGS. 166 (a) and 166 (c), during the operation effect reception period generated at the timing t12, the second special state in which the suspended state is released and the symbol is in the variable state. Of the jackpot determination on the symbol side, or the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side in the hold state, targeting the jackpot determination that is determined to have the highest expectation level in the prefetch determination, the expectation degree for the jackpot determination is Control is performed as indicated by a change in the display mode (color, etc.) of the operation promotion display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 166 (a), until the timing t13 when the second time has elapsed after the operation effect reception period has occurred. You will never get a big hit. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), when an operation on a predetermined operation means is received during the operation effect reception period, basically, the second is in a state where the symbol is in a fluctuating state when the operation is received. It is determined that no big hit is obtained in either the special symbol side jackpot determination or the second special symbol side jackpot determination in the hold state, and it is difficult to select a relatively high expectation level based on the determination. Control in which an operation effect appears so as to select any one of the three levels (high, medium, and low) of the expected levels in a manner in which the low expected level is easily selected.

  However, even in such an example, for example, during the period when the 26th symbol variation shown in FIG. If there are four judgments or during the 27th symbol variation shown in FIG. 166 (d), there are three jackpot judgments on the second special symbol side in the hold state. If there is more than one, the prefetch determination of “4” evaluated with respect to the big hit determination corresponding to the 30th symbol variation is the highest expectation, so that only a short time remains until the timing t13 arrives. Although not performed, the operation promotion display is displayed as a display mode (blue, red, or gold) according to the evaluation of “4”.

  In this case, if the player operates the operation means without being confused until the timing t13 arrives, the second in the hold state for the jackpot determination performed after the operation effect reception period ends. It is determined that the big hit is obtained in the special symbol side jackpot determination, and based on the determination, a high expectation level is relatively easy to select and a low expectation level is difficult to select. , Low) expectation degree can be selected, and a situation can be generated in which control is performed so that the operation effect appears so that the expectation degree is indicated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 166 (d) as well, the operation effect acceptance period ends when an operation on a predetermined operation means is accepted, or when timing t13 arrives. Thereafter, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), when the 30th big hit determination is performed, the big hit is obtained as a result, and the symbol variation (30th symbol variation) corresponding to the big hit is performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), within the 30th symbol variation thus started, a successful effect appears in the add-on challenge effect, and at the timing t23, the 30th symbol variation (big hit variation) is digested. Will end. When the 30th symbol fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) is completed, the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is terminated, and if the big hit is a specific type (or 16R probability big hit A), it is a new one. A round game (game block) is further executed. Then, each time a round game (game block) is consumed, the contents of the effect of accumulating the number of round games (game blocks) that are continuously executed are developed.

  Thus, according to the example of production shown in FIG. 166, it is expected to obtain the following effects.

  That is, according to the production example shown in FIG. 166, first, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, a pressing operation on the upper plate production button 257) is left undecided as to which symbol variation is to be produced. Or an operation effect receiving period for receiving a touch operation on the touch panel 246 for a predetermined time (second time). And on this, in a situation where such an operation effect acceptance period has occurred, the state that has not yet been digested at the time when the operation for the predetermined operation means is accepted while multiple variations of the symbol are sequentially digested An effect that shows the degree of expectation for a certain symbol variation can be made to appear.

  As described above, when the operation target reception period is not generated but when an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, the target is determined and the effect is executed. The time required to be executed is greatly reduced, and an effect using a predetermined operation means is suitably executed even in a situation where a shortening variation shorter than the effective period of the operation effect acceptance period is performed. Will be able to.

  Also, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 166, when the extra challenge effect that is performed during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is positioned as one specific effect using a predetermined operation means, Predetermined operation in spite of the situation where the symbol variation is shorter than the time when the specific performance is performed (here, 18 seconds which is the shortest time within the specific time range converged by the special control) Control that causes a specific effect using the means to start and causes an effect regarding the next symbol variation to appear even if an operation on a predetermined operation means is accepted after the symbol variation has ended Can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment first performs the operation effect reception period even after the jackpot determination that has been put on hold when the operation effect reception period occurs is exhausted. Can be continued. Then, when there is an operation on a predetermined operation means during the operation effect reception period that is continued in this way, according to a random number (here, the second special random number) that has not yet been acquired when the operation effect reception period occurs. Even if the jackpot determination is put on hold at the time when the operation is performed, or the execution condition is satisfied at the time the operation is performed, It is assumed that an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination that is in the on-hold state or the jackpot determination that is in a state where the execution condition has been established and the symbol variation is being performed is caused to appear. Therefore, even in a situation where a game can proceed at a fast pace due to so-called shortened fluctuations, one specific effect using a predetermined operation means can be suitably realized, and a decrease in game entertainment can be suppressed. It becomes like this.

  Also, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 166, after an operation effect acceptance period for accepting an operation on a predetermined operation means occurs, the jackpot determination in the hold state is sequentially replaced with another jackpot determination as time passes. In particular, an effect for a determination process that is in a hold state when an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means is executed. That is, in this case, since the production target itself changes depending on the timing at which the operation on the predetermined operation means is performed, even if the operation production acceptance period occurs at a specific timing, it depends on the operation timing on the player side. Thus, it is possible to realize a novel production in which the production expectation level as to whether or not a special result is obtained changes fundamentally by 180 degrees.

  In addition, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 166, when a high expectation reception display (for example, a red operation promotion display) indicating that the expectation degree is relatively high appears, the high expectation reception display is displayed. Do you operate the specified operating means while it is appearing, or do not operate the specified operating means, and an effect that seems to be more highly anticipated before the remaining operation effect acceptance period elapses (for example, gold color) The operation promotion display) is given to the player in the hope of waiting for it to appear, and a situation where the production is produced depending on the player appears.

  That is, in this case, if a hit is obtained before operating the predetermined operation means, or the operation effect reception period left without operating the predetermined operation means elapses (timing t13 comes), Since the opportunity to operate the predetermined operation means itself is lost, the timing of operating the predetermined operation means from the balance between the production end condition and the production expectation level (even with compromise) It is possible to provide an effect such as whether to operate a predetermined operation means).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166, when there is no operation on the operation means, the determination that is thus the target of the high expectation reception display (for example, the red operation promotion display). Even after the symbol variation corresponding to the processing is stopped, the operation effect reception period is continued without being ended. However, the high expectation acceptance display should be hidden (in this case, a different color (such as blue) will appear) before the symbol variation corresponding to the target determination process is stopped. Is desirable.

  Further, when “1” is obtained as a result of the prefetch determination, an effect related to the prefetch determination may not be performed. In this case, “blue” may be set as the default color as the operation promotion display.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 166, the operation effect reception period occurs when a certain time (here, the first time) has elapsed since the start of one specific effect (here, the extra challenge effect). , It is required to end when a certain time (second time) has passed since the occurrence. In this regard, the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is converged within a specific time width regardless of which symbol variation is a big hit or a big hit is not obtained. Even when one specific effect (in this case, an extra challenge effect) is performed over a plurality of symbol variations, the operation effect reception period in which the above-described control request is required can be suitably generated.

  However, even within the period when the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, if a big hit that is not a specific type (16R positive variation big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit, 2R normal big hit) is obtained, within a specific time width The effect of converging is not achieved. Therefore, if a big hit (16R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) that is not a specific type is obtained within the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the type obtained at that time is obtained. It is desirable to switch to the effect corresponding to the big hit (complete bonus effect, advantageous end effect) and execute this.

  In this case, when a big hit that is not a specific type is obtained in the operation effect reception period, and the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit is performed, the timing t13 is set even if the operation with respect to the predetermined operation means is not performed. At the stage before arrival, the operation effect reception period and the operation promotion display for prompting an operation on a predetermined operation means are ended. According to such a configuration, since the end condition of the operation effect reception period is increased, the timing at which the predetermined operation means is operated based on the balance between the end condition of the effect and the expectation of the effect (compromise) Even if the predetermined operation means is operated, it is possible to provide the above-described effects more suitably.

  Further, when the first variation pattern table T1 or the second variation pattern table T2 is referred to in the second variation pattern setting process, the operation effect acceptance period for accepting an operation on a predetermined operation means is the second It is set as a time shorter than the big hit fluctuation when a specific type of big hit on the start port 2102 side is obtained and longer than the loss fluctuation. Therefore, even in the situation where a game can progress at a good tempo by so-called shortened fluctuations, even if a big hit is obtained, one specific effect over a plurality of symbol fluctuations using a predetermined operation means is suitably realized. It becomes possible to be able to do, and the fall of a game entertainment interest can be suppressed now.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 166, even in the situation where the special control is performed by the main control MPU 4100a, the first challenge effect is started after the add-on challenge effect is started at the timing t11 as in the case of the add-on challenge effect in the inter-block interval period. The operation effect acceptance period is generated at the timing when the time has passed, and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation to a predetermined operation means is caused to appear on the liquid crystal display device 1900. However, during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, there may be a situation in which there is no jackpot determination in the hold state and no symbol variation is performed. Therefore, after the first time has elapsed after the start of the extra challenge production at timing t11, control is performed to generate the operation production acceptance period on the condition that the symbol variation is performed, or the extra challenge production is performed at timing t11. When there is no jackpot determination that is on hold at the time when the first time has elapsed since the start of the event, and there is no symbol variation, no operation effect acceptance period is generated. It is desirable to control.

  Further, the generation timing of the operation effect reception period may be triggered by other timing such as the start of symbol variation or the start winning prize.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 166, in the situation where the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the extra challenge effect that appears when it is in the inter-block interval period is caused to appear. Above, it is not always necessary to perform the extra challenge effect, and one specific effect different from the extra challenge effect may be performed. For example, even in such a case, expectation of symbol variation that has not yet been digested when an operation on a predetermined operation means is accepted while multiple symbol variations are sequentially digested. In a situation where a game is allowed to progress at a high tempo due to the appearance of the degree indicated, or by so-called shortening fluctuations, it is possible to suitably realize one specific effect using a predetermined operation means, The production expectation level regarding whether or not a special result can be obtained depending on the timing of the operation, which realizes a novel production that itself changes fundamentally by 180 degrees, the production end condition and the production expectation level It is possible to provide an effect such as at which timing to operate the predetermined operation means from the balance (whether the predetermined operation means should be operated even if compromised).

  In view of the fact that the result based on the big hit determination for 30 times can be realized as one specific effect, it is possible to have 30 times the degree of expectation than the effect that appears within one symbol variation. For this reason, for example, it may be executed as an effect that appears in a highly anticipated reach effect, or may be executed as a dedicated high expectation effect that does not appear in other effects. However, in this case, it is important to execute a common (specific) effect that encourages the player to maintain a right-handed strike in both the period during which the special control is performed and the highly anticipated reach effect.

  Further, in the operation effect performed based on the operation on the predetermined operation means during the operation effect reception period, the expectation of three levels (high, medium, and low) is shown. In addition to one of the expectations (high, medium, low), or separately from this, an expectation (100%) that definitely indicates that a big hit can be obtained may be indicated.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 166, the prefetch determination is performed for all of the 30 jackpot determinations performed from timing t11. However, the prefetch determination is performed only for a part of the jackpot determinations. May be. For example, in the pre-reading determination, it is first determined whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect (change in the display mode of blue, red, and gold). Make it appear. From then on, it may be desirable not to perform a new pre-reading effect until the jackpot determination that is the subject of the pre-reading effect is digested or until the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination is exhausted. You can expect the effects of

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to drastically improve the probability of accepting a game ball to the second starting port 2102 when it is in a short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) The two start ports 2102 are arranged in an area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 141, when the game balls are continuously driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, all of those game balls are In this case, a flow-down structure that is sequentially guided to the second unit 2120 through a guide passage member 2142 that is resin-molded so as to flow down while maintaining a mutual discharge interval (0.6 seconds) is used (continuous). Acceptance promotion means).

  That is, the second unit 2120 according to this embodiment has a second start port through which a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 in the unit 2120 can be won by moving the movable piece 2106 according to the passage. 2102 has the following characteristics so that a prize can be won through the first passage 2122a and the recess 2121b (passage from the gate portion 2105 to the second start port 2102) integrally formed in the unit 2120. It has become.

  First, when it is detected by the gate sensor 2126 that a game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 143) acquires a normal random number based on information indicating that this detection has occurred. Then, a determination (ordinary determination) is made as to whether or not the normal winning is obtained based on the ordinary random number thus obtained. Further, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 143) causes the normal symbol display 1189 to variably display the normal symbols for a predetermined time based on the result of the normal determination. As a result, when it is determined that the normal hit is obtained in the normal determination (when the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time and a specific stop display mode appears), the main control board 4100 (FIG. 143). Control) controls the movable piece 2106 to be in an open state.

  In this respect, the guide passage having a predetermined length in the second unit 2120 requires a game ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 for a substantially uniform time due to the structure integrally formed in the unit 2120. Thus, the guide is surely guided to a region that can be received by the second start port 2102 (a movable region of the movable piece 2106). On the other hand, in the short-time state (the game state in which the so-called opening extension function operates), the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 arrives at the second start port 2102 (while substantially uniform time elapses). The main control board 4100 (see FIG. 143) executes the above-described normal determination, normal symbol fluctuation display, and drive control for opening the movable piece 2106, so that the normal hit can be obtained. The game ball itself that has passed 2105 can be received by the second start port 2102 (see FIG. 112).

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is always “0.08 seconds” in the short time state, and the normal symbol pattern is fixedly displayed. The time from when the movable piece 2106 is opened is “0.008 seconds”, and the time that the movable piece 2106 is kept open is “5.5 seconds”. The time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2106 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the next normal symbol variation start (game ball detection by the gate sensor 2126) is allowed is “0.05 seconds”. ing.

  On the other hand, in the second unit 2120 according to this embodiment, the time “0.. 0 from when the game ball passes through the gate 2105 (ordinary symbol) (starts to change) until the movable piece 2106 is opened. It takes only “088 seconds” (or time “0.1 seconds” added with a slight margin time (for example, “12 ms”)) to reach the second starting port 2102. More specifically, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is meandered (decelerated while increasing the distance) by a concave portion 2121b (guide route) that is curved backward, and then reaches the movable region of the movable piece 2106. Thus, such a time is ensured while the size of the unit 2120 is reduced.

  As a result, when a win is obtained in the normal lottery when the time is short, the game ball itself that causes the win to be obtained by passing through the gate portion 2105 is guided in the second unit 2120. Through the path (first passage 2122a, concave portion 2121b), the movable piece 2106 can be received from the movable region to the second start port 2102. Since such an open state continues for a long time of “5.5 seconds”, the game ball is 0.6 seconds in the area on the right side of the center object 2500 in the game area 5a. When the game balls are launched at intervals (100 game balls are sequentially launched at a constant interval), the game balls enter the second start port 2102 via the guide passage member 2142 and the second unit 2120. It can be accepted one after another with its firing interval (0.6 second interval).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, maintaining the big hit determination holding state on the second special symbol side during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is to obtain the intended effect. is important. Therefore, about the time required for the loss fluctuation when it is in the short-time state and the time required for the stop of the loss symbol, each of them is set so that the total time exceeds 0.6 seconds, It is desirable to be able to increase the number of pending jackpot determinations on the second start port 2102 side if the right hand is maintained.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the small bonus can be won in the lottery on the second special symbol side. However, this small bonus is won in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may or may not be performed.

  In the above embodiment, when a small hit is obtained, a special control flag is set when the small hit gaming state is ended, so that a predetermined number of special symbols are obtained after the small hit gaming state is ended. The special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed in a period until it is performed (period until the special control flag is reset). However, even if a small hit is obtained, the type of the small hit is determined based on the design random number, and the special control flag is set only when the type is a specific type, so that the small hit gaming state is ended. The special control by the main control MPU 4100a may be performed during a period until a predetermined number of special symbols are performed (period until the special control flag is reset). According to such a configuration, when a small hit that contributes to the continuation rate of the above-described round accumulation effect is obtained, it is possible to further provide gameability such as whether or not the round accumulation effect can be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In the above embodiment, a specific time value (0.1 second) is selected during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, regardless of the number of fluctuations. I did it. However, in this case, only the very short time of 0.1 seconds is selected even in the last loss variation (30th loss variation) in the period during which the special control is performed. It would be difficult to display some image.

  Therefore, a dedicated variation pattern table that is referred to at the time of the last variation in the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is prepared. In the variation pattern table T7, a specific time value (0 .. When a failure production is performed in an extra challenge production within a period in which the last loss variation is performed by associating a time value longer than (1 second) (for example, the same time as the big hit (3 seconds)) Some images may be displayed on the screen.

  However, even in the case of realizing such control, it is desirable that the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is converged within a specific time width. For example, if the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is changed to the period until the 26th loss variation is digested, the variation pattern table T6 shown in FIG. It will function as a dedicated variation pattern table that is referenced only during the first variation. And in this variation pattern table T6, only by changing the setting so that the variation time is 3 seconds instead of 0.1 seconds with respect to the loss, a predetermined number (here, (26 times) When at least a specific type of jackpot is obtained before digestion, even if the jackpot is obtained with any symbol variation, a specific hit that is close to the inter-block interval period (for example, 18 seconds) It becomes possible to converge within the time width (here 18 seconds to 20.4 seconds). Further, even when a predetermined number (in this case, 26 times) of digestion fluctuation of the second special symbol is digested without interruption, it takes 18 seconds, which is the same as the inter-block interval period (for example, 18 seconds). Will be able to. Furthermore, even when the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed is changed to a period until the 26th loss variation is digested, the probability that a big hit will be obtained during the period will be 50%. Therefore, a big hit is often obtained in a period that is attracting interest, such as “Can the production contents be advanced” in the period controlled to the time-short state (high probability time-short state), and the time is shortened? It is possible to provide a sharp game by preventing sagging in the state.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when a loss is obtained in all the big hit determinations during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the lower limit of the specific time width (18 seconds to 20.4 seconds) to be converged The period was ended at the time. That is, in this case, there is a margin of 2.4 seconds (20.4 seconds-18 seconds) with respect to the upper limit time (20.4 seconds) of the specific time width to be converged. Even if the symbol variation is interrupted within the period, if the period is within 2.4 seconds, it is possible to end the period within a specific time width (18 seconds to 20.4 seconds). Therefore, during the period in which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the time when the symbol fluctuation is interrupted is monitored (determined), and if this is within 2.4 seconds, the time started when the control is performed in the period. It is desirable to continue the specific production (addition challenge production). On the other hand, when the time when the symbol variation is interrupted exceeds 2.4 seconds, the one specific effect (addition challenge effect) started when controlled during the period is ended and a predetermined effect is obtained. It is desirable to make it appear and to digest the change in the special symbol for the remaining number of times while the effect appears.

  In addition, even when the hold state of the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side (and also on the first special symbol side) is not maintained, the main control is performed regardless of the length of time that the reserved state is not maintained. These may be maintained without ending at least one of the above-described special control by the MPU 4100a and control related to execution of the extra challenge effect. That is, in this case, the operation effect reception period is continued without being terminated even in a situation where the big hit determination (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not in a suspended state and the special symbol is not in a variable state. It will be. In such a state, if a predetermined effect is performed when an operation on a predetermined operation means is accepted, the winning rate at the start port is poor even though the time is short. Even if it is a case (a state where the special symbol is not put on hold and the special symbol is not in a fluctuating state), it is possible to maintain the game entertainment. In addition, as a predetermined effect, in addition to a dedicated effect, the contents of the effect that can appear as an operation effect when the jackpot determination hold state on the second special symbol side is maintained (for example, three stages (high, medium , Low) of the expectation degree).

  However, depending on the player, it may be recognized that the jackpot determination (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not put on hold and the special symbol is not in a variable state. It is also conceivable that it is not desired that an operation effect appears by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in this situation. Therefore, the operation effect reception period is controlled so that the jackpot determination (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not put on hold and the special symbol is not in a fluctuating state so that it is not terminated midway. It is desirable. As such control, for example, in the situation where the jackpot determination (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not put on hold and the special symbol is not in a variable state, an operation effect acceptance period occurs. It is possible to achieve this by stopping the timer that counts the elapsed time since.

  In the above embodiment, when all the big hit determinations are lost in the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, the time required for the last loss variation to be digested is the specific time that is converged. Although it is within the range, the time required for the last loss variation to be digested does not necessarily have to be within a specific time range. Even in such a case, when a special type of big hit is obtained within the period during which the special control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed, an extra challenge production is performed within the inter-block interval period, and the extra challenge production is performed. It is possible to make it appear as if a successful production has appeared.

  Further, various effects and display images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 instead of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit (16R positive variation big hit B, 12R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit, 4R positive variable big hit) on the second start port 2102 side ends (special control flag is set) The above-mentioned special control is performed when either of the two is satisfied or when the small hit gaming state based on the small hit on the second start port 2102 side is completed (special control flag is set) did. However, for the above-mentioned special control, only when a big hit gaming state based on a specific type of big hit on the second start port 2102 side (16R probability variation big hit B, 12R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit) is terminated. Alternatively, it may be performed only when the small hit gaming state based on the small hit on the second starting port 2102 side is terminated.

  In addition, the time set as the inter-block interval period in the big hit game may not be constant, and it may be combined with a plurality of relatively long times (for example, the time required for the extra challenge production in the time-saving state described later). 18 seconds, 18.6 seconds, 19.2 seconds, 19.8 seconds, 20.4 seconds, etc.) may be set. However, in this case, for example, the symbol random number assigned as 16R probability variation jackpot B is further classified into a plurality of types (for example, 5), and the length determined according to which type is obtained. An inter-block interval period with a mark will appear. According to such a configuration, the length set as the inter-block interval period is different, and a plurality of 16R probability variation big hits B in which the same control is performed otherwise are prepared. When a plurality of 16R probability variation big hits B are prepared, it is advantageous in that it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish from the added challenge effect when in the short-time state.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2101 First start port 2102 Second start port 2105 Gate unit 4100a Main control MPU
4140a Peripheral control MPU

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of the start condition;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on a result of determination by the determination means;
Advantageous game control means for performing advantageous control for the player when a special symbol aspect appears due to the symbol variation by the symbol variation means,
A holding means capable of holding the determination by the determining means up to a predetermined upper limit number of holds;
In predetermined effect condition, among the operation acceptance for even before Symbol operating means are acceptable in any of them symbol variation when multiple symbol variation being the state of the pending is sequentially digested, the operation If reception is made, it can generate a specific operation Starring unloading suggests expectation that the special symbol aspects appear in symbol variation in symbol variation or execution state is in a state of hold when the manipulation reception is made specific Operation effect control means,
The specific operation effect control means includes
Even in the case where the number of symbol variations exceeding the predetermined upper limit of the number of reservations is sequentially digested, any of these symbol variations can allow operation reception to the operation means with respect to the specific operation effect,
When the number of symbol variations exceeding the predetermined number of reserved upper limits is sequentially digested, an effect mode according to a result determined when the symbol variation is newly digested is an operation on the operation means for each symbol variation. It can be displayed during the period when reception is allowed,
The specific operation while appearing different second representation embodiment the first said and if the operation acceptance has been made about the specific operation effect in a state in which the representation embodiment has appeared first representation embodiment as the representation embodiment in the case where the operation reception related effect is made, the game, wherein a percentage of the expected degree of the special symbol aspect appears appears as suggesting high expectations representation embodiment said specific operation directing and go relatively high are different Machine.